JP5961334B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine configured to send a control command from a main control unit to an effect control unit to generate an effect.

  Conventionally, a ball game machine has a lottery lottery regarding a big hit that is advantageous to the player at the time of winning a prize at the starting opening, and an image display is a stunning symbol variation display game (decorative symbol display game) with a decorative symbol variation display operation. (Variable display game) is performed, and various notice effects that reflect the result of the big hit lottery are generated during the game, thereby enjoying the game.

  In general, this type of ball game machine is based on a main control unit that oversees game operations, an effect unit that produces an effect related to the game, and an effect control command from the main control unit. An effect control unit that controls the effect operation of the effect during the display game, and the main control unit performs the jackpot lottery and transmits information on the lottery result to the effect control unit on the effect control command, and the effect control unit However, the control relating to the decorative symbol variation display operation and the various notice effects in the symbol variation display game is performed.

  In the above jackpot lottery, a “winning lottery (winning lottery)” that draws whether it is “hit” or “losing”, and if it is “hit”, the type of jackpot (for example, the probability variation belonging to the jackpot type) “Lottery (Lottery type lottery)” for lottery of big hits, types of big hits such as big hits, non-probable big hits, and latent probable big hits. The main control unit, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, based on the jackpot lottery result, “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information related to the variation display operation of the game symbol required for the symbol variation display game, A “decoration symbol designation command” including stop symbol information to be finally stopped and displayed is transmitted to the effect control unit. This variation pattern designation command includes, as variation pattern information, “variation display time” from symbol variation start to variation stop and “winning lottery result information”, and the decorative symbol designation command includes a winning type lottery result. Contains information. Thereby, the basic information required for the symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit.

  However, display control that executes processing related to the contents determined by the main control unit, which is a game control means for managing the progress and control of the game, and the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device, such as when an error occurs in the effect control command There may be a discrepancy between the content determined by the production control unit, which is a means. Therefore, the effect control unit determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command have been normally received. If not received normally, the decoration control unit performs decoration based on the winning type information indicated by the variation pattern designation command. A display that determines the display result of the symbol variable display operation has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

  However, regardless of whether or not the content of the variation pattern designation command is accurate, the display result of the decorative symbol variation display operation is determined based on the winning type information indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The content determined by the production control unit based on the result may not match the display result determined by the main control unit. For example, when the decorative symbol derived and displayed (determined display) when the winning result is “big hit” is displayed on the image display device even in the big hit gaming state, even in the big hit gaming state, There is a possibility that the decorative design that is erroneously determined on the side will continue to be displayed.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the type of the confirmed decorative pattern matches the winning type information, and if it is determined that it does not match, during the big hit gaming state, during the round including an image indicating “???” It has been proposed to display an image (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2004-000345 A JP 2006-218053 A

  However, in the method for determining the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command as in the above-mentioned patent document, if the presentation control unit knows the current gaming state regarding the decision of the presentation, it is included in the variation pattern designation command. If the variation pattern designation command changes due to noise or momentary power interruption, for example, during the symbol variation display operation, under the “Spring” background effect under “Normal effect mode” There is a problem that the production under the 'winter' background production that should appear under "Probability Variation Production Mode" appears, although the production should appear.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to determine the consistency between the change pattern designation command and the command including the current gaming state information so as not to mislead the player in relation to the current gaming state and the appearing effect. It is to provide a gaming machine.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) main control means (main control unit 20) for comprehensively controlling game operations including operation control related to variable display operations for displaying and stopping display of game symbols.
Effect display means (liquid crystal display device 36) configured to be able to display the game symbol variation display operation in an effect manner;
Effect control means (effect control unit 24, effect control side main processing in FIG. 23) for controlling the game symbol variation display operation in the effect display means based on a control command from the main control means;
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player after a specific symbol display mode is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
The main control means includes
The winning lottery means for executing the winning lottery for determining whether to win the special gaming state or to lose the special gaming state when a game ball enters the starting means (FIG. 15). S409)
Based on the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means, a winning type lottery means (S410 in FIG. 15) for executing a winning type lottery for a plurality of types of hits and at least one type of loss;
Game state data management means for managing game state data (variation pattern distribution designation number) for specifying the current game state from a plurality of types of game states [variation pattern distribution designation number buffer, variation pattern distribution designation When the number management area game state is transferred, the process of changing the variable pattern assignment designation number (S481, S486, S490 in the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 21B), the game state transition preparation process (S411 in FIG. 15, FIG. 15) 18 S434)))], and
Based on the winning type lottery result by the winning type lottery means and the gaming state data, a variation pattern related to the variation display operation of the gaming symbol is a plurality of types associated with the winning type lottery result and the gaming state data. A variation pattern selecting means (S412 in FIG. 15) for selecting any variation pattern from among the variation patterns;
First control command creating means for creating a first control command including game state data information capable of specifying the game state data (creation of variation pattern assignment designation number command: S407 in FIG. 15);
Prior to execution of the game symbol variation display operation, first control command transmission means (transmission of variation pattern distribution designation number command: S407 in FIG. 15) for transmitting the first control command to the effect control means; ,
Second control command creation means (special symbol variation pattern creation processing: S412 in FIG. 15, FIG. 19) for creating a second control command including variation pattern information that can identify the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means S441-S449),
Prior to the execution of the game symbol variation display operation, second control command transmission means for transmitting the second control command to the effect control means (transmission pattern designation command transmission processing: S413 in FIG. 15);
Third control command creation means (decorative symbol designation command creation processing: S415 in FIG. 15) for creating a third control command including winning type lottery result information capable of specifying the lottery result by the winning type lottery means;
Prior to the execution of the game symbol variation display operation, a third control command transmission means (decorative symbol designation command transmission process: S416 in FIG. 15) for transmitting the third control command to the effect control means, Prepared,
The production control means includes
Control command receiving means capable of receiving the first control command, the second control command, and the third control command (receive command analysis processing S073 in FIG. 23, variation pattern distribution designation number command reception in FIG. 27) Processing, variation pattern designation command reception processing of FIG. 28, decorative symbol designation command reception processing of FIG. 29),
Based on the variation pattern information included in the second control command received by the command receiving means and the winning type lottery result information included in the third control command, the game symbol variation display mode on the display means And a symbol change display control means (effect control unit 24, effect control side main process in FIG. 23) for determining a stop display mode and controlling a change display operation of the game symbol in the effect display means,
The symbol variation display control means includes:
Based on the gaming state data information included in the first control command and the variation pattern information included in the second control command, the gaming state data in which the variation pattern is included in the first control command; Gaming state consistency determining means (first consistency determining means, S721 in FIG. 27, S731 to S733 in FIG. 28) for determining consistency as to whether the variation patterns are related to the same gaming state data;
When it is determined that the game state consistency is determined to be consistent, the game symbol is variably displayed in a variation display mode based on the variation pattern information included in the second control command as a variation display mode at the time of matching. Matching display operation control means (S752 in FIG. 29: YES processing route);
Inconsistency display operation control means (S752: NO in FIG. 29) for controlling so that the game symbols are not variably displayed in the variability display mode at the time of alignment when it is determined by the gaming state consistency determination means. Processing route),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the present invention, the game state data management means manages the game state data for specifying the current game state from among a plurality of types of game states. The “game state” here is a variation pattern. It means a gaming state used when selecting, and typically indicates a gaming state based on a change pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, there are five types of game states according to the change pattern allocation designation number (Tcode): normal A, normal B, normal C (low accuracy), normal C (high accuracy), and high accuracy. The consistency determination is performed using the three types of consistency determination tables shown in FIGS. 53, 54, and 55. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where all of these five types are prepared, but when two types of high-accuracy state and normal state are prepared, or high-accuracy state and multiple types of normal states are prepared. It may be the case.

  In addition to the case where the gaming state here indicates the gaming state by the change pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), or in place of this, the gaming state (internal gaming state) by the gaming state determination number (YJ) is used. It may be a case of pointing. For example, it varies depending only on the internal gaming state (normal gaming state (without electric support, low probability), latent state (without electric support, high accuracy), probability change state (with electric support, high accuracy)) The game state (selected game) that is used when selecting a variation pattern when the pattern is selected and the covert effect mode (Gase secret effect mode and real secret effect mode) is installed. State) refers to the internal gaming state (big win lottery state). When selecting a variation pattern, either the normal gaming state (no electric support state, low probability) or the latent state (no electric support state, high accuracy) The variation pattern is selected under the gaming state where the user is staying at one side. Even in such a gaming machine, a mismatch between the gaming state specified by the received variation pattern and the gaming state at the time of selecting the variation pattern may occur, so the received variation pattern designation command and the control command including the gaming state information The occurrence of unexpected effects can be prevented in advance by controlling the game symbols so as not to be variably displayed in the variation display mode at the time of alignment. Therefore, the case where the game state (internal game state) based on the game state determination number (YJ) is handled is also meaningful, similarly to the case where the game state on the effect by the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is handled. The game state consistency can be determined.

  Further, the present invention is a case where the game state staying when selecting the variation pattern is determined by the internal game state, and the internal game state includes the special game state (win game) and the privilege game state (electric support). It can also be applied to the case of any of the attached game state systems). For example, a game when selecting a variation pattern based on a game state designation command such as a normal state (low probability state without electric support), a probabilistic change state (high probability state with electric support), or a short time state (low probability state with electric support) The consistency with the state may be determined.

  In the present invention, in the case of inconsistency, controlling the game symbols not to be variably displayed in the variability display mode at the time of matching means that the variably display operation is performed in a variability display mode or stop display mode different from the normal time, This includes a case where the variable display is simply stopped without performing such a variable display operation.

  Further, in the present invention, when the “abnormal variation display mode” appears as a result of the game state consistency determination, an abnormal performance does not naturally appear. In the present invention, the term “variable display operation” is a concept including a variable display mode and a stop display mode.

(2) The symbol display control means
Based on the variation pattern information included in the second control command and the winning type lottery result information included in the third control command, the winning type result information in which the variation pattern is included in the third control command. And a winning type consistency determining means (second consistency determining means: S753 in FIG. 29) for determining consistency as to whether the variation pattern is related to the same winning type result information.
The matching display operation control means includes:
When it is determined that the game state consistency determination means and the winning category consistency determination means match, a variation display mode based on variation pattern information included in the second designated command is used as a variation display mode at the time of the matching. The game symbols are variably displayed (S752 in FIG. 29: YES processing route),
The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
When it is determined that the game state consistency is determined to be inconsistent by at least one of the game state consistency determination unit and the winning category consistency determination unit, the game symbol is controlled not to be variably displayed in the variation display mode at the time of the alignment (FIG. 29). S752: NO processing route)
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that.

  According to (2) above, when determining the consistency between the decorative symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command (winning type consistency judgment), the game state consistency judgment (gaming state consistency judgment) is assumed as the premise. Regardless of whether it is implemented first or later, the winning type consistency determination can be made without directly considering the gaming state itself.

(3) The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
When the gaming state consistency determining means determines that the game is inconsistent, the game symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a variation display mode at the time of abnormality different from the variation display mode at the time of matching as the variation display mode at the time of the mismatch.
The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, wherein

(4) The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
After displaying the game symbols in the abnormal variation display mode, the game symbols are stopped and displayed in an abnormal stop display mode (combination of symbols of “426”) indicating the inconsistency.
The gaming machine according to (3) above, characterized in that.

(5) The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
A first determination result determined as inconsistency by the gaming state consistency determination unit, a second determination result determined as inconsistency by the winning type consistency determination unit, the gaming state consistency determination unit, and the Corresponding to each determination result of the third determination result determined to be inconsistent by the winning type consistency determination means, at least one of the abnormal time variation display mode and the abnormal time stop display mode appears Controlling the game symbol variation display operation so as to control the game symbol variation display operation,
The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that.

(6) The abnormal time variation display mode includes a plurality of types of abnormal time variation display modes,
The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
When the abnormal variation display mode is displayed, the abnormal variation display mode corresponding to each determination result of the first determination result, the second determination result, and the third determination result is displayed. ,
The bullet ball game machine according to (5) above, wherein

(7) The abnormal stop display mode includes a plurality of types of abnormal stop display modes,
The inconsistency display operation control means includes:
When the abnormal stop display mode is displayed, the abnormal stop display mode corresponding to each determination result of the first determination result, the second determination result, and the third determination result is displayed. ,
The gaming machine according to (5) or (6) above, wherein

(8) The abnormal stop display mode is a symbol display mode other than the specific symbol display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6) above, wherein

(9) The production control means includes:
The notice effect control means (the effect control side main process of FIG. 23, the effect control side timer interruption of FIG. 25) that controls the appearance related to the gaming state in accordance with the game symbol change display operation in the effect display means. Processing),
The notice effect control means includes:
When it is determined that the game state consistency is determined to be consistent, as an effect accompanying the variation display mode at the time of the alignment, an effect based on the variation pattern information included in the second designated command is controlled to appear. Notice effect control means (S762 to S764 in FIG. 29);
If the game state consistency determining means determines that the game is inconsistent, the inconsistency notice effect control means (S766 in FIG. 29) controls the appearance of the abnormal effect different from the effect associated with the variation display mode at the time of matching. Variation start processing at the time of inconsistency)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (8), wherein

  In the present invention, when the “abnormal variation display mode” is made to appear, the abnormal production naturally does not appear, but in addition to the above, as the production processing at the time of abnormality different from the variation display processing, Such inconsistency notice effect control means may be included.

  According to the present invention, even if a problem occurs in transmission / reception of a control command, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified in relation to the current gaming state and the appearing effect.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the random number determination process in FIG. 11 in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special stop symbol data creation process in FIG. 11 in FIG. 10. In FIG. 10, it is a flowchart which shows the starting opening winning random number determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the random determination process for the special electric accessory operation | movement determination in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special stop symbol creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the small hit symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lose symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for a variation pattern selection at the time of winning which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning command distribution table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning prize command distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning command distribution table for loses concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the pending | holding addition commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for jackpots concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for fluctuation pattern selection at the time of the fluctuation | variation start which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table 1st hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the hit fluctuation pattern designation | designated command which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the loss variation pattern designation | designated command which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for small hits concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table for small hits which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the consistency determination table between received commands when the game state is normal A or normal B based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the consistency determination table between received commands when the game state is normal C based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the consistency determination table between received commands when the game state is changing probability according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 has a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pays out the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). And a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball rental device. Further, the upper tray unit 8 has a built-in lamp that is lit during a predetermined input reception period and can be operated (input reception is possible), and a push button that can change the effect by pressing when the built-in lamp is lit. An expression frame effect button 13 is provided. This frame effect button 13 functions as a manual operation means that can be operated by the player.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball as a board surface partition member. A substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center ornament 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and allows the game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Acts as a sorting member (flow channel sorting means). In the present embodiment, the center ornament 48 is arranged at the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, whereby a flow path of game balls is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with a fixing screw or the like, and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and displays on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (not shown) that provides a visual effect by its operation mode at an appropriate place.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. This round number display device 39b functions as a round display means for informing a specified number of rounds related to a big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). The number of rounds is reported.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start opening 34 (first special symbol start opening) and a normal variable winning device 41 having a lower start opening 35 (second special symbol start opening) are provided above and below, Detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a, lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each.

  The upper start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). FIG. 1 is a prize-winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and is configured as a winning-rate fixed-type winning apparatus that does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). Yes. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an opening that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into a state (easy winning state) and a closed state (winning difficult state) that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning port related to the normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start opening 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left You may form only in the flow-down path | route 3b.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the “large winning opening closed state”, it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable blade 47 of the normal variation winning apparatus 41 is operated.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and a prize can be awarded from either the left or right flow down path. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has its operating condition that the game ball passes (wins) to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the operating condition is substantially. It can be said that it belongs only to the right flow path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device according to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall control (game operation control) related to game operations in general, and an effect control command from the main control unit 20. In response, an effect control unit (effect control means) 24 that comprehensively controls effect operation control (performance appearance control) for images, light, and sound, and a payout control board (payout control means) that performs payout control of prize balls. 29 and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from an external power supply (not shown). In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ). The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Although not shown, the main control unit 20 is a random number generation circuit for generating a random number for lottery related to a special symbol variation display game, a periodic interrupt to the Z80 system, and a pulse output generation function (bit rate) at a constant cycle. Generator), CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) that provides time measurement functions, and interrupt controller circuits that demonstrate interrupt functions (including interrupt disable functions) such as timer interrupts that give interrupt signals to the CPU ing.

  Here, the CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog or equivalent). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 also includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, the A register (accumulator), the F register (flag register), and the B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (general-purpose registers) that store general-purpose data are stored. PC register (program counter) storing data indicating the position of the program, SP register (stack pointer) storing the stack pointer (address indicating the current position of the stack area), and memory block of the RAM 401b performing the refresh operation R register (refresh counter) that stores data indicating IX, IX that stores data indicating a reference position when referring to the storage area of the RAM 401b, IY register (index register), and an interrupt to be referred to when an interrupt occurs I register (interrupt Vector registers), main registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L), auxiliary registers (A ', F', B ', C', D ', E') , H ′, L ′) and dedicated registers (I, R, IX, IY, SP, PC).

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning at the general winning opening 43 are connected. Detection signals from these can be received.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable blade piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  In addition, a composite display device 38c is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the composite display device 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified round number by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that comprehensively manages pachinko hall gaming machines, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. On the main control unit 20 side, based on this payout state signal, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, specifically, there is a problem in payout of award balls (payout error: for example, a ball jam or a prize It is monitored whether or not the ball is not paid out.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command carrying information related to the special symbol variation display game to the effect control unit 24. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt is provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, LED light emission control, movable body accessory operation control, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 performs a light production and a sound production, a light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and the LED, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motor 61 is provided.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and the effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13. In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a movable object accessory motor 61 for controlling the operation of the movable object accessory, and the effect control unit 24 transmits a control signal for controlling the movable object accessory motor 61. It is possible.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game is started in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the big win lottery result is “big hit”, it is in a predetermined “big hit” mode, otherwise In this case, the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” manner, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit”, the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, that is, the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. The big prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the variable prize winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, thereby opening and closing the big prize opening 50. An advantageous special gaming state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is' lost ', the lottery type is lottered' A big hit lottery including 'is performed, and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of the special symbol and a special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the big hit lottery result, special symbol variation time, etc.) and special stop symbol information ( A “decorative symbol designation command” including symbol lottery result information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (a reach effect via a reach state, which will be described later, or a pseudo-continuous effect with a pseudo-variable display operation). To explain in detail, the variation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into “hit variation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing variation pattern” in the case of loss, according to the big hit lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for designating reach production (reach variation pattern) for designating the occurrence of reach production, a variation pattern for designating non-reach production (normal variation pattern) without designating the occurrence of reach production, pseudo-continuous production and reach production Reach fluctuation pattern for designating pseudo-continuous productions that specify multiple occurrences (Regular fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo-continuous productions that specify the occurrence of pseudo-continuous productions and specify the generation of pseudo-continuous productions, but do not specify the occurrence of reach productions) (Normal fluctuation pattern with continuous) etc. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation pattern with pseudo continuous, information specifying the number of pseudo continuous can be included.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the special symbol variation display game period and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assist”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state, The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state.

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the lower winning opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower winning opening. Also good.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  In the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of changes in the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserved memory number) of the number of operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, a different maximum number of reserved memories may be set for each symbol (for example, a maximum of four on the special symbol 1 side, a maximum of two on the special symbol 2 side, a maximum of six on the normal symbol side, etc.). In addition, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of stored operation-reserved balls on the symbol side where the profit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a big hit type with a high profit for the player (see FIG. 32 to be described later), for example, the special symbol 2 side is a maximum of four and the special symbol 1 side is a maximum. It may be set to one.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 serves as a functional unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). A lottery number improvement state in which the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as its function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes the “low probability state”, and the gaming state becomes “latent”. In the case of “probability state” or “probability change state”, at least the big hit lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. Further, during the big hit, all functions are deactivated, and basically, the player is placed in the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time-shortening function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, the electric chew support state provided with the open extension function is handled as the “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). When paying attention to the presence or absence of the electric chew support state, when the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, there is “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”). When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, “electric chew support state exists” (hereinafter referred to as “electric support state”).

  In the present embodiment, in order to diversify the effects related to the gaming state, one internal gaming state is further classified and managed. For example, in the above “normal gaming state (low probability / no electric support)”, “normal gaming state A (normal A)”, “normal gaming state B (normal B)”, and “normal gaming state C (normal C)” Are included, and are managed as different game states. In other words, even in the same normal gaming state, a condition for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern selection state): later-described variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), corresponding to gaming state data. (Refer to FIG. 50)).

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When paying attention to the “gaming state”, the same “normal gaming state”, but regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, each of a plurality of types of gaming states (variation pattern selection mode) “normal A” to “normal C” Therefore, the effect control unit 24 can generate an effect under an effect mode (details will be described later) corresponding to each game state. In this embodiment, while the internal gaming state is the same “latency state”, the gaming state relating to the occurrence of the production is managed as the above “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, It is possible to generate effects corresponding to the same game state as “normal A” to “normal C” under the normal game state (variation of special symbols specifying transition conditions of each game state and the content of the effect) Details regarding the pattern will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, the types of “internal gaming state” when attention is paid to each function relating to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, the normal gaming state (normal state), the latent probability state, and the probability variation state Is included. On the other hand, the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) described later)” when focusing on the determination of the production, More than the types of internal gaming states, normal A, normal B, normal C, and probability change states are included. As described above, in this embodiment, the game state (internal game state) focused on the big win lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support is managed differently from the game state focused on the determination of the production, so that the internal game state is Even if they are the same, a plurality of types of effect modes can be realized. Thereby, the variation of the production under the same internal game state can be made rich. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode))) when paying attention to the determination of the internal game state and the effect is described. Without distinction, it may be simply referred to as “game state”.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a big hit lottery for a plurality of types of hits. The hit types include "15R long open probability variable big hit", "10R long open positive variable big hit", "2R short open latent big hit", and "small hit (small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C)" Includes multiple types of hits.

  Among these hits, “15R long open probability change big hit”, “10R long open probability change big hit”, and “2R short open latent change big hit” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device. "Is a hit belonging to the" non-big hit "type that does not trigger the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous action device for performing a round game. A combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Both the hits belonging to the “big hit” type and the hits (small hits) belonging to the “non-big hit” type are hits that trigger the transition to a special gaming state involving opening / closing operations of the big prize opening. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the 'big hit' type, “15R long open probability change big hit”, “10R long open probability change big hit”, and “2R short open probability big hit” have at least a high probability of the gaming state after the big hit game ends. It is a big hit that belongs to a “probability big hit” to be shifted to a gaming state with a state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). Note that “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R long opening chance change hit game)
A winning game with a 15R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this embodiment, the winning prize port 50 in one round game is The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game after a predetermined interval time (the same applies to the winning game by 10R long opening probability change big hit described later, and the winning game by 2R short opening latent big hit) . The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has elapsed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. Time width (for example, 20 ms). Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during this pre-opening interval, the game ball is treated as invalid.

(4-2-2.10R Long Opening Probability Hit Game with a Big Hit)
The winning game by 10R long open probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “10R positive variable big hit game”) is the same as the content of the 15R positive variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is ten. Therefore, the 10R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 15R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for five rounds).

(4-2-3.2R hit game with short open latency big hit)
In a win game based on 2R short-open latency big hit (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent big hit game”), the specified round number is a big hit with two rounds, and in this embodiment, a big winning opening in one round game. The maximum opening time of 50 is set to 0.1 seconds of “short opening time”. Here, the “short opening time” is defined as a time span in which it is difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, one of the conditions for closing the big prize opening is within the “short opening time”, depending on the performance of the launching device (for example, the continuous shooting speed performance of game balls per unit time) and the formation position of the big prize opening. It is impossible to reach the “Maximum Wins”. In 2R latent big hit games, the big winning opening 50 is only opened for a short time and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so it is a big hit game with virtually no winning balls. (Accurately, there is a possibility that a winning of the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, the possibility is extremely low. Virtually no prize balls can be obtained).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent large hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as 15R probability variable big hit game or 10R probability variable big hit game may be set so that a winning to the big winning opening 50 is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the maximum winning number. Although it is possible, it is set to an opening time (an intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50. May be. In order to vary the number of winning balls, the maximum winning number may be set to a different number according to the type of jackpot.

(4-2-4. Winning games with small hits (A per small hit-C per small hit))
In a hit game with a small hit A to a small hit C (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening 50 is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 per round is 2R. It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time of the game with a large probability of winning, and the interval time from the closing of the first winning port 50 to the opening of the second winning port 50 is 2R. The same time width as the interval time is set. Also, regarding the closing condition of the big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, 9) Either one of the conditions is satisfied. This is also the same as the 2R latent big hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed as if the 2R short open big hit big win was won. It is possible to dress like In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game (the effect that appears during the hit game) has the same or very similar effect as the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game. In other words, the operation related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the operation related to the 2R short open latency big hit, and which hit game is executed as viewed from the player side. Identification is difficult or impossible. As a result, even if the player wins a small hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation for winning the 2R short open latent big hit.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(Game state after 4-3-1.15R probable big hit game ends)
After the 15R-probability big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning, it is shifted to the “probable change state”. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, The total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total variation number of the special symbols 1 and 2) (the same applies hereinafter): for example 70 times) The jackpot is determined until the game ends or within the predetermined number of times ( When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit and the occurrence of the big hit game is confirmed. (It may be the case that the big hit is won. The same applies hereinafter) The probability variation state continues until the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big hit, the probability variation state is terminated, and the next game is shifted to “normal A (internal game state is normal game state)”. There. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol variation display game that has been completed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit (excluding a small hit) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the big hit lottery probability is at least high. This is a probability-variation machine (number-of-times probability variation machine (ST machine)) that terminates the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary.

(4-3-2.10R probable big hit game state after game end)
After the 15R probability variable big hit game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, the game is shifted to the “probability changed state”, and the game state transition after this probability changed state is the same as in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit described above.

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latency big hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit (when the internal game state is the normal game state or the latent state), “normal C (internal game state) Is in the “probability state”), if it is “probability change state”, it is shifted to “probability change state”. The “normal C” here is managed as the same gaming state as the “normal C” in which the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state as described above, but the substance is that the internal gaming state is in the latent state. “Normal C (latency)”.

  When the game becomes “normal C” after the 2R latent big hit game ends, the big hit is made until the special symbol variation display game is finished for the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “normal C” continues until it is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended, and the next game is changed to “normal A”. To be migrated. That is, when the specified number of STs is divided into the first half section and the second half section, the first half section is placed under “normal C” and the second half section is placed under “normal A”. Therefore, when the transition is made from “normal C” to “normal A”, the internal gaming state is shifted to “normal A” in the latent state.

  The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game including “normal C” in the first half section after the above-described latent state becomes “normal A” or until the end of the specified ST number (70 times), or “Normal A” continues until the big hit (including small hits) is confirmed within the specified number of STs, and the special symbol variation display game is terminated without the big hit (including small hits) being determined within the specified number of STs. Sometimes, the high probability state ends, and the next game shifts to “normal A” in the normal game state. In other words, after the “normal C” is reached after the 2R latent big hit game ends, if the big win is not won within the specified number of STs (for example, 70 times), the internal game state is “normal C” in the latent state. (Special symbol variation display game execution count 30 times) ”→“ Normal A (special symbol variation display game execution count 40 times) ”in the same state (ST specified number of times completed) → Internal game state is“ normal game state ” Game state transition such as “A”.

  As described above, the “15R long open probability change big hit” is transferred to the first big hit game, and after the first big hit game is finished, the first privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. It functions as a “first jackpot” for shifting to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state). In addition, the above “10R long open probability change big hit” is the second big hit in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. It shifts to a game, and functions as a “second jackpot” that shifts to the first bonus game state after the end of the second jackpot game. In addition, the above “2R short-opening latent big hit” is a third game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. The second bonus game state (in this embodiment, “latency probability”) is transferred to the jackpot game, and the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first bonus game state after the end of the third jackpot game. It functions as a “third jackpot” for shifting to the state “).

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time state” is not generated even if any big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other big hits that generate a short-time state after the big hit game ends (non-probable big hits). May be provided as one of the big hits of the present embodiment (for example, 10R long open probability change big hit may be used as the short and big hit). In this case, the condition for ending the short-time state is that the special symbol variation display game is executed until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ends or until the big hit is confirmed or won within the predetermined number of times. can do. In this embodiment, at least when the game is shifted to the high probability state, the special symbol variation display game is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (the number of specified STs), or the big hit is confirmed or won in the predetermined number of times. It was explained that the high probability state continues until However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other jackpots (non-ST probability variable jackpots) that maintain a high probability state until the next jackpot is confirmed or won regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be provided. (One kind of jackpot of this embodiment (for example, a 15R long opening probability variation jackpot) may be a non-ST probability variation jackpot). In addition, “ST probability variation big hit” which is a trigger for changing to the number of times cut probability change such as 15R / 10R long open probability big hit of this embodiment, “latency probability” which is a chance to shift to a latent state such as 2R short open latent big hit. One or more types of “big hit”, “short time big hit” that triggers the transition to the short time state, or “non-ST probability big jackpot” that triggers the transition to the non-ST probability variation state can be included. In addition, a “normal big hit” may be provided that does not give any benefit after a winning game, that is, an opportunity to shift to the normal gaming state.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
Next, the gaming state after the small hit game will be described. Here, after the small hit game, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small win is not performed. For this reason, both the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed. However, in this embodiment, the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, while the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number in FIG. The transition control of Tcode)))) 'is performed. Thereby, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same game state, it is possible to stay in the effect mode in which both perform the same effect. That is, even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state after each small hit game when the small hit A to small hit C is won will be described in detail.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit A)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination varies depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, it is transferred to “normal B”, and when it is “probability change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. When the “normal B” is reached, the “normal B” continues until the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. However, when the special symbol variation display game is completed without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the “normal B” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”.

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, the game state is shifted to “normal C”, and when it is “probability change state”, the game state is changed to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit B, until the special symbol variation display game ends for the second predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) or until the big hit is confirmed within the predetermined number of times. When the “normal C” continues and the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. It is like that.

(4-4-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit C)
After the small hit game by the small hit C, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, the game state is shifted to “normal C”, and when it is “probability change state”, the game state is changed to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit C, the special symbol variation display game is played for the third predetermined number of times (preferably, “the second predetermined number of times <the third predetermined number of times” and “the first predetermined number of times”). Number of times satisfying at least one of the relationship of “predetermined number of times = third predetermined number of times” (in this embodiment, for example, 30 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times “C” continues, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without the big win being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” ends, and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. ing. Accordingly, the “normal C” transferred due to the above-mentioned small hit C winning and the “normal C” transferred due to the above small hit B winning are in the same gaming state. However, the stay period of “Normal C” ends in 30 special symbol fluctuation display games (“Normal C (30 times)” in the figure) or 15 times (“Normal C (15 in the figure)”) Times))).

  Here, the above-mentioned “normal C” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent probability winning game is over. For this reason, when the mode is shifted to “Normal C” due to the 2R short open latency big win, small B win, or small C win, each of the production modes (“Normal C”) is produced. Will be in the “normal C effect mode” described later), and whether or not the internal game state is the “latency state” in the effect, that is, whether the jackpot winning probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state It is concealed. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, it is noted that the mechanical gaming operation state that appears on the appearance is the same state (both are ' By preventing the player from perceiving what kind of gaming state from the stage of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state. Yes. In particular, if the special symbol variation display game is ended 15 times without winning a big win or a small win, and the next game also stays in a production mode corresponding to “normal C”, the small win C win is won. Or because it is limited to whether or not 2R short open latent big hit is won, the expectation that “normal C (30 times)” may have entered a higher probability state than “normal C (15 times)” Will increase further.

  Even in the case of transition from “normal C” to “normal A”, in order to leave the player with a high probability state expectation, the “normal C” continuation count is less than the specified ST count. Preferably there is. Further, according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), not only the transition from the “normal C” to the “normal A” but also the special symbol variation display game while staying in the “normal C”. After the predetermined number of executions have been completed, a predetermined transition lottery is performed each time the special symbol variation display game is executed. If the transition lottery is won, the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” Also good. For example, if 2R short open latency probability change big hit or small hit C is won, after the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the transition lottery is performed, and if small hit B is won, the second predetermined number of times After finishing (for example, 15 times), the above-mentioned transfer lottery is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to forcibly shift to “normal A” when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the transition lottery until the specified number of STs ends.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) corresponding to each gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an effect mode that produces an effect related to the current gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, during the “normal A” stay, a “normal A effect mode” that produces an effect related to this, while during a “normal B” stay, a “normal B effect mode” that produces an effect related thereto, A “normal C effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “normal C” stay, and a “probable change effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “probable change state”. There are various types of performance modes. In addition, the “normal C effect mode” corresponding to the “normal C” is an effect in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed and the player is given an expectation of a high probability state. Plays the role of “secret mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls the transition of the effect mode, and a specific effect control command (game state designation command) sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). : A presentation control command for designating the current gaming state or informing that the gaming state is to be transferred), in a form that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side. It is comprised so that transfer control between production modes is possible.

  Also, in each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbol is, for example, “normal” so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player is staying in. Under “A production mode”, a background production reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background production in which a background image of a cherry tree is displayed: the first background production), and under “normal B production mode”, the season “summer” is associated. Background effect (for example, background effect for displaying a background image of the sea: second background effect), under the “normal C effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “autumn” (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) Displayed background effect: 3rd background effect) Under “Probability change effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, a background effect displaying a snowy mountain background image: a fourth background effect) Is Toggles control.

  Note that the “normal C effect mode” of the present embodiment is the same effect mode regardless of whether the internal game state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal game state (low probability state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect control command including internal game state information at a predetermined timing from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 (for example, a “variation pattern designation command”, “decoration symbol designation command”, “game state designation command”) ”, A command sent during a hit (such as a“ hit hit start command ”or“ hit hit end command ”)), depending on the internal gaming state, It is configured to be capable of transition control between “normal C effect mode (first secret effect mode)” and “gase normal C effect mode (second secret effect mode)” under the normal gaming state (low probability state). Also good.

  For example, in the case where the internal game state is “normal game state” and “winning small B” or “small hit C” is won and the normal gaming state is maintained, after the small hit game ends, “normal C effect” The mode is shifted to the “Gase normal C performance mode (low probability)” while the internal gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “latent probability state” and becomes “2R short open latent probability big hit”. In the case of winning and shifting to the latent probability state, after the 2R latent large hit game, the transition control to the “real normal C performance mode (high accuracy)” of the “normal C performance mode” is possible. can do. In this case, regarding the effects under each effect mode, the background effects of both the “genuine normal C effect mode (high accuracy)” and the “gase normal C effect mode (low accuracy)” are the same (for example, In both cases, the background effect reminiscent of the season 'autumn'), while the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret, the above-mentioned "genuine normal C effect mode (high accuracy)" and the above In the “normal C effect mode (low probability)”, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect is made different, and an inferred element as to whether or not it is in a high probability state can be given to the player (for example, the above-mentioned The “genuine normal C effect mode” increases the probability of occurrence of a specific effect (implying that there is a possibility of a latent state, suggesting a latent expectation effect to be implied) rather than the “gase normal C effect mode”. For example). Thereby, the player can be given a sense of latent expectation as to whether or not the current internal game state is a latent probability state, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, during the symbol variation display game, the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect of reach effect) Based on the presence / absence and the variation time of the special symbol, etc., a function unit (notice performance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the big hit lottery result under the aforementioned effect mode is provided.

  Such effects include not only notice effects represented by “reach effects (effect aspects related to reach variation pattern)” but also those that occur in association with these effects or independently. These performance modes suggest (notice) the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter referred to as “winning expectation expectation”) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and the player's winning expectation to the winning type ( It functions as a “scoring production” to earn a winning expectation. The winning-winning expectation varies depending on the level of appearance (selection rate) of the performance and the gaming state. For example, the expected winning degree in the reach effect changes mainly according to the appearance rate (selection rate) of the reach effect. Specifically, the expectation of winning a win when one reach production (for example, a strong SP reach) appears is the ratio at which the reach production including a big hit and a loss is executed (all occurrences of the reach production) Rate), it is indicated by the ratio (the rate of appearance of the reach effect at the time of winning) that the reach effect is executed in the case of a big hit. In other words, the winning degree expectation level for the reach production is indicated by “appearance rate of the reach production at the time of winning / total appearance rate of the reach production”. The selection rate for reach production is set. Hereinafter, the notice effect according to the present embodiment will be described.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode that accompanies the reach state, and specifically refers to an effect mode that displays the final result via the reach state. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived Is a variable display mode that can be associated with the player. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. Is a part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot is generated (winning winning) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol indicate “7”, so-called “listening state (reach symbol)) However, a display mode in which the finally derived result does not necessarily indicate the occurrence of jackpot, for example, “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, “7 (right symbol)” is derived. However, a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, a middle symbol that does not form a hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, rocked, enlarged, reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. However, in the stage before the final result is displayed, It refers to the state or the state in which the possibility of the occurrence is continuing. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result is a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach production” is a notification (improvement) of the jackpot winning expectation degree (which may be a big hit (including the fact that it will be a big hit)) indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not you won the big hit. There are multiple types of reach productions associated with the jackpot winning expectations. For example, when a reach effect with a specific reach state appears, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively higher than when a reach effect with a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears There is. Such reach production with a specific reach state is referred to as 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. It should be noted that the “reach production” is dressed like a non-reach production (so-called “normal fluctuation”) that does not go through the reach state in addition to the N reach or SP reach through the reach state, and the final derived result ( Reach effect (sudden hit reach effect) that strikes the player's intention, such as a combination of decorative symbols) is a stop display mode showing a big hit, a predetermined variation time through or without going through the reach state In addition, it is possible to include a premium reach effect (full-reach reach effect) such as performing a variable display while maintaining the display mode showing the big hit and notifying the big hit winning decision. These special reach productions are used as a production mode for notifying that a big hit will be made (a big win winning decision).

  The reach effects of this embodiment are provided with the following types of reach effects. First, reach production can be broadly classified as “N-reach, weak SP reach A, weak SP reach B, strong SP reach A, and strong SP reach B” for “normal A” or “normal B”. "Special reach" type dedicated to "definite change", "reach during probability change" type dedicated to "probability change state", and the like. These reach production types include one or more types of variation patterns. For example, “weak SP reach A type” is “weak SP reach A1 to A3”, “weak SP reach B type” is “weak SP reach B1 to B3”, and “strong SP reach A type” is “strong”. SP Reach A1 to A3 ',' Strong SP Reach B Type 'is' Strong SP Reach B1 to B3', 'Special Reach' Type is' Special Reach 1 to 3 ', and' Probably Reaching Reach 'Type Includes 'probability changing reach 1-3' (see, for example, FIGS. 45 and 46).

  The expectation degree for winning a big hit in the reach effect varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach effect and the gaming state. For example, between different types of reach, it is related to the big win lottery result so that the expectation of winning a big hit is high due to the relationship of “N reach <weak SP reach A <weak SP reach B <strong SP reach A <strong SP reach B”. And the selection rate (incidence rate) is determined, and among the same kind of reach, the larger the number, such as “weak SP reach A1 <weak SP reach A2 <weak SP reach A3”, the greater the expectation of winning the big hit The selectivity is determined so as to increase. Note that the actual degree of big hit winning expectation varies depending on whether other notice effects are involved. For this reason, for example, even if the weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation level for winning a big hit is involved, the expected degree of winning a big hit can be equal to or higher than the strong SP reach.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
The “pseudo-ream” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. Specifically, in a decorative symbol variation display game, a part or all of a decorative symbol is temporarily stored. Whether or not a set of fluctuating motions is performed multiple times by repeating the display operation such as temporarily changing to the temporarily stopped state and executing the decorative pattern re-variable operation from the temporarily stopped state once or a plurality of times. A variable display mode expressed as follows. When performing this pseudo-variation, while forming a temporary reach state (a change display state that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state before the temporary stop state, or that the reach symbol appears to stop) Once a temporary stop state is reached with a combination of symbols that have lost, a re-variation operation is performed, or a special decorative design (a special decorative design that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) instead of a normal decorative design (Pseudo continuous activation chance symbol)) is included in the temporary stop state and then the re-variation operation is performed. It may also indicate to the player that there is a possibility. The occurrence rate (probability of occurrence of a pseudo-ream according to the number of pseudo-reams) is mainly determined so that such “pseudo-ream” increases the probability of winning a big hit as the number of pseudo-reams increases. In other words, it is possible to expect an SP reach type with a relatively high probability of winning a big hit as the number of pseudo-reams increases.

  Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern with a pseudo effect), the “pseudo-ream” is generated at a stage before a reach state is formed (an earlier stage of reach effect) For example, as a notice that there is a possibility that a reach effect may occur, a combination of symbols (reach symbols) when a part or all of the stopped symbols constituting the combination of symbols in the temporary stop state forms a reach state. A pseudo-variation operation suggesting that there is a possibility of composition is performed, and after the pseudo-variation is completed, a final game result is derived via the reach state. In the case of a production scenario that does not include a reach production (in the case of a production mode based on a normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuations), the final game result is derived without going through the reach state after the pseudo variation is completed. become. Here, the fluctuation display developed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of going through the reach state, the reach state is formed by the main fluctuation and the final game result is obtained. Is derived. In the present embodiment, the expression “pseudo N times (N = 2, 3, 4)” means a series of fluctuation display times N including the pseudo-continuous and the main fluctuation. For example, in the case of “pseudo 2”, a pseudo variation display operation is performed twice in total, such as a pseudo variation once + main variation, that is, a pseudo variation once, and then a real variation display. In addition, when “Pseudo 3 (or Pseudo 4)” is described, it is assumed that this variable display is made after a pseudo series 2 times (or Pseudo 3 times). Times) pseudo fluctuation display operation is performed.

  In addition, in the case of the production mode accompanied by the pseudo-ream and the reach production, different production modes of “pseudo-run” and “reach production” are combined. Unless otherwise required in the book, reach production with pseudo-ream is treated in the same way as “reach production”.

(5-2-3. Button notice effect)
The “button notice effect” refers to an effect mode in which the content of the effect can be changed depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13, and the so-called “player participation type” effect mode. Say. In this “button notice effect”, information prompting the player to operate the frame effect button 13 is notified during a predetermined operation reception period, and depending on whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated during this notification period. After that, the presentation will change, for example, by changing the character display currently appearing or generating special sound effects, it is possible to suggest the expectation of winning big hit ing. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased.

(5-3. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, the effect is that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (the change display operation of the special symbol). There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being offered, “pre-fetching determination” is performed in advance to determine the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (the “variation start time” executed based on the execution start condition of the symbol variation display game being satisfied) Process related to “Large winning lottery”: S409 in FIG. 15 (Random number determination process for operation determination of special electric accessory), and process related to “look-ahead determination” executed based on the fact that the operation holding ball is generated and the start condition is satisfied: FIG. 10 S319 and S339 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing)).

  Furthermore, by using the result of the “pre-reading determination”, the “pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the special symbol when the operation-pending ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game in the future. (See S323 in FIG. 10 and S343 in FIG. 11 (start-up winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, the reach variation pattern for specifying the reach effect via the reach state (reach variation pattern), or the normal variation pattern for designating the non-reach effect that does not pass through the reach state ( It is determined in advance whether the normal variation pattern is obtained. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side includes not only the variation pattern type but also the variation pattern at the start of variation. Also, information on whether it is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or a “lack fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a lose is also included. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, when the “hold addition command” including the information of the prefetch determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the prefetch determination included in the command is received. An effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the content of the result is performed. This hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and is composed of data on the upper byte side for designating the number of active hold balls at the time of prefetch determination, and lower byte side data that can specify the contents of the prefetch variation pattern (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the hold addition command includes the operation hold ball information and the prefetch variation pattern information. However, when the hold control command is received, the effect control unit 24 does not necessarily cause the pre-reading notice effect to appear. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined by lottery and the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executable, The pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed at the timing when the operation holding ball is generated, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game to be performed first, or at a predetermined timing during the game. It is like that.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation. Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “strong SP reach A1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach A1”, but the “strong SP reach A” type, which is the main point. It is possible to specify that the variation pattern (strong SP reach A1 to A3) of the same system “strong SP reach A” is classified as “strong SP reach A type”. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “strong SP reach A type” appears. Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is that there is a possibility that a roaring effect (in this case, a strong SP reach A type) with a high expectation of winning a big hit will occur for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. Information on whether it is high or low, in other words, information on whether the chance of winning a big hit is high or low, and by notifying the player in advance of such information before the action-holding ball is digested In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(5-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIGS. 5 and 6)
Next, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 5 and 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : “○ (white circle mark)” in the figure)) or in the light-off state (no operation hold ball: circle in the broken line in the figure), information on the current number of the operation hold balls is notified (see FIG. 5 (A)). .

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. (See FIG. 5 (b)). Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display parts a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three as the number of the operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 5 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons in the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the object of the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation degree for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected degree of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It has become. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation holding ball has been consumed, the display position of the holding display portion corresponding to the existing operation holding ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) makes a special notice effect appear over a plurality of symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “pre-change notice effect at the start of change” refers to, for example, displaying a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and executing it continuously over a plurality of symbol change display games. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. If the right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is to be performed, and if this pre-reading notice lottery is won, those symbols will be displayed for all existing reserved memories at that time Make the variable display game an expression with some relevance. For example, in all the symbol variation display games related to the existing operation hold ball from the oldest operation hold ball to the pre-read notification target operation hold ball in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. . In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. (B) Run only the winning change system (holding display changing system), (b) Run only the change start change system (image display change system), (C) Winning change system and change start change system It is possible to adopt various execution forms such as executing both of the above. Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “look-ahead” pre-announcement effect appears, the “pre-change change system at the time of winning” does not necessarily appear, and the pre-change notice effect of the “change system at time of winning (pending display change system)” The pre-reading notice effect of “change start time change system (image display change system)” can be generated simultaneously. What kind of execution mode is used can be determined as appropriate. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed by other directing means. For example, a movable object (not shown) is operated in a pre-read-only operation pattern to straddle a plurality of symbol variation display games. It may be configured to be able to appear as a pre-reading effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation of winning a big hit during this symbol change display game, the expectation for the big win is combined with the contents of the look-ahead notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are manifested by the rendering means arranged in the gaming machine. Any directing means can be employed as the directing means in the present invention as long as it is a stimulus transmitting means that can appeal to human perception such as vision, hearing, and touch. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45, LED device, speaker 46, and liquid crystal display device 36, sound generating device, effect display device, or a vibrating device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, or a movable body having a visual effect An example of such a feature is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” mainly refers to a type that produces an effect by image display, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a part or all of the period during which a roaring effect with a relatively high expectation degree for winning a big hit is occurring) , To prevent the frame effect button 13 from being pressed), or to provide special effect means placed in a difficult operation state (for example, making it difficult to press the frame effect button 13), or to vibrate the manual operation means. An exciting device may be provided.

<5-4. Consistency between commands>
In the present embodiment, on the effect control unit side, a variation pattern allocation designation number command (current gaming state) and a variation pattern designation command (winning result, variation pattern corresponding to the current gaming state) transmitted from the main control unit are sent. ), The consistency of the decorative symbol designation command (winning type: winning type, so the winning result is also indirectly included) is determined.

  This only depends on the current gaming state information included in the variation pattern designation command when the effect control unit knows the current gaming state only by determining the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command. For this reason, the variation pattern designation command may be changed due to noise or the like, resulting in inconvenience.

  For example, in reality, the main control unit side should have transmitted a variation pattern designation command (for example, a variation variation pattern H1 in FIG. 49) that is a variation pattern selected only in the “normal A / B” gaming state. As a result, what the effect control unit receives is changed to a variation pattern designation command (for example, a variation variation pattern H21 in FIG. 49) that designates a variation pattern that is selected only in the “probably changing” gaming state. There is. In this case, under the background effect of normal A (under the “normal A effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of a cherry tree: the first background effect). The effect that should be produced is the effect that should appear under the background effect (for example, the background effect that displays the background image of the snowy mountain: the fourth background effect) that is reminiscent of the season 'winter' under the "probability change effect mode". For example, there will be an effect that “snow” falls even though it is “spring” (notice effect), giving the player a sense of incongruity and making the player mistaken for a moment. is there.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the variation pattern allocation designation number command transmission processing (step S408) in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 15), the “variation pattern allocation designation number including the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) information” is displayed. The “command” is transmitted to the effect control unit for each symbol variation display operation.

  In addition, the effect control unit side uses this variation pattern allocation designation number command to indicate the current gaming state (in this specification, not the internal gaming state itself, but normal A, normal B, normal C, ), The variation pattern is grasped by the “variation pattern designation command” transmitted in the subsequent stage variation pattern designation command transmission process (step S415), and further in the decorative pattern designation command transmission process (step S418) in the subsequent stage. The winning type is grasped by the transmitted decorative design designation command.

  By determining the consistency of the variation pattern designation command, decoration symbol designation command, and variation pattern distribution designation number command that are sent for each symbol variation display operation, it is possible to detect inconsistencies when inconsistencies occur. Appropriate performance processing is not performed. In the present embodiment, consistency is determined for each command transmitted in time series. Specifically, a variation pattern allocation designation number command, a variation pattern designation command, and a decorative symbol designation command are sequentially received (FIGS. 27, 28, and 29). First, during a variation pattern designation command reception process (FIG. 28). The consistency between the variation pattern assignment designation number command and the variation pattern designation command is determined, and then the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command is determined in the decoration symbol designation command reception process (FIG. 29). . These consistency determinations are performed with reference to the determination tables of FIGS.

  If the variation pattern assignment designation number command and the variation pattern designation command are inconsistent, the fluctuation combination is performed with a combination of symbols “426” as a specific display symbol, and the combination of symbols “426” after the variation time has elapsed. Stop at. Also, if the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are inconsistent, the fluctuation is changed with the symbol combination “246” as the specific display symbol, and after the variation time has elapsed, the symbol combination “246” is stopped. Let Further, if there is consistency between commands for all of the variation pattern assignment designation number command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol designation command sent from the main control unit side, a normal effect is displayed.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 22>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7-22, the game operation | movement process in the main-control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before starting the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step S012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018).

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary sub-counter, a random counter for determining auxiliary sub-unit, a random number 1 counter for variation pattern, a random number counter 2 for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S21, two initial value generation counters for generating initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number 1 counter, and a variation pattern random number 2 The counter is updated to generate the above various soft random numbers. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the variation pattern random number 1 counter is 0 to 238, a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the variation pattern random number 1 in the RAM 203, and 1 is acquired as the acquired value. After adding, it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination processing in step S12, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). Therefore, in such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S12 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S14 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to the discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S16, the RAM clear process is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. The game restoration process necessary to start the game from the state is executed.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thus, it is monitored for each interrupt whether or not a winning is detected (a winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of game balls (winning balls) won. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, a large A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 50 and a prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43 for the general winning opening 43 are provided. Further, in this input management process, it is also monitored whether or not there is an illegal prize based on whether or not the detection information from the prize detection switch has won a prize during a period in which the prize should be allowed. For example, when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects a game ball even when the movable wing piece 47 is not operating, or when the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball even when the big hit game is not being played. Assuming that this is an illegal prize, the prize detection information is invalidated, and a predetermined error process is performed in an error management process (step S055) described later to notify the outside of the invalidation.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). In this error management process, an abnormality in the gaming operation state (for example, occurrence of illegal winning) is monitored, and when an operation abnormality (error) occurs, a predetermined error process is performed. As the error process, for example, a predetermined game operation (for example, a game ball payout operation or a game ball launch operation) is stopped, or an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to the effect means. Informing that an error has occurred.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the occurrence of the open electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S57). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize)). The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, an image that prompts the player to “right-hand” on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display “right-handed”) or a right-handed sound from the speaker 46. Sound effects (eg, “Right-right” sound) are generated. This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this command. The launch position guidance effect is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed (a special symbol variation display game has started or ended) Information), information such as winning information (the effect of winning at the start opening or the big winning opening, and information on the number of winning balls).

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S59.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper starter port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol for the special symbol 2 side (lower starter port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302).

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, when the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing relating to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branch process in step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306: FIG. 15), the special symbol variation processing (step S307: FIG. 20), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308: FIGS. 21A to 21B) are as follows. It will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. 8, and the special symbol variation display and stop display on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 1 side due to the winning of the upper start opening 34, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1 (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 to be described later. (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. To do. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates a random number by hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random value: not shown). This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for special jackpot determination random values in RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer) provided separately from the reserved storage area of RAM 203, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value at the time of winning is stored in the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer and the reserved storage area. If not provided, it may be stored in the reserved storage area as it is, and the jackpot determination random number value in the corresponding reserved storage area may be read at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the probabilistic state. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side in the gaming state with the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that when the player is placed under a “power support state” such as “probability change state”, the “high base game” in which the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved as compared with the normal game state. State (in this embodiment, the win rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved: in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 255/256). Therefore, the player sets the launch position on the normal symbol start port 37 side. When aiming (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right-down flow path 3c), the number of the operation reservation balls according to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 operation reservation ball") is frequently Presumed to occur. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electrical support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 1/256)” Further, due to the fall direction changing member such as a game nail, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the upper start opening 34 side, or it is configured not to be guided. When aiming at the launch position, it is a game that brings disadvantages. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  Also, as a second reason, in order to improve the fun of the game, when the look-ahead notice effect is varied, for example, a look-ahead notice effect related to the jackpot type (particularly, a look-ahead notice effect that can identify the selected jackpot type) This is because the following problem arises when it is possible to generate the error. In the present embodiment, when both the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball exist, the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially digested. Means) ”(see FIG. 15 showing details of a special symbol variation start process in step S306 described later). With this priority variation function, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. For this reason, when placed in a state where there is an electric support, for example, only a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball currently occurs, If the player recognizes this, the lower start port 35 is intentionally stopped from launching the game ball. The special symbol variation display game 1 on the non-priority variation side is deliberately executed, so that it is possible to deliberately aim at the high profit jackpot, and from the viewpoint of technical intervention problem It is not preferable.

  In addition, as an example of the problem of technical intervention, there is some pre-reading notice effect for special figure 1 action holding ball (especially, pre-fetching notice effect with a relatively high expectation of winning a big hit, If only a low profit big hit (for example, a pre-announcement effect that predicts the winning of the 2R short open latent big hit) occurs, if the player recognizes this, the special figure 2 action holding ball will not be interrupted By continuously executing the special symbol variation display game 2 which is the priority variation side, the game can be advanced while receiving the benefits of the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side). I can go. Specifically, the special symbol 2 side of the big hit lottery excludes low profit 2 "short open latent big hit" and "small hit" among the big hit types, and high profit "10R long open positive change big hit" Or “15R long open probability change big hit” is a lottery target. For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Use this to maximize the benefits of the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 2 side until the end of the power support state (until the end of the specified number of STs), if the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 action holding ball is known After receiving, the problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 action holding ball related to the winning and easily obtaining a big hit, will cause inequality among players.

  In the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, a section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited is configured to be switchable according to the gaming state. . Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, the prefetch determination processing on the special figure 1 side: S317 to S323 in FIG. For example, a prefetch determination process on the special figure 2 side: S337 to S343 in FIG. And the second prefetch prohibition state in which the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination means is prohibited and the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means is allowed (for example, in the state without electric support: “Normal A” ”To“ Normal C ”), and a function unit as prefetch prohibition state control means for switching control based on a predetermined switching condition. The prefetching prohibition state control means switches to a third prefetching prohibition state in which prefetching judgment by the first prefetching judgment means and the second prefetching judgment means is completely prohibited based on a predetermined condition. Prohibiting means can be provided. Examples of the “predetermined condition” include a case where a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. This is because, during a winning game, the special symbol change display operation is not performed even when the operation holding ball is generated, and therefore it is not necessary to perform the pre-reading notice effect. Also, there are cases where the big hit lottery probability fluctuates before and after the hit game due to the big hit (excluding the small hit) (in the big hit game of this embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win, it temporarily shifts to the low probability state. (See S475 in FIG. 21A described later). In this case, an operation holding ball is generated during a big hit game, and if a prefetch determination is made for this, a win determination is made in a low probability state at the time of prefetch determination, and a win determination is made in a high probability state at the start of fluctuation. This is because a situation occurs and the processing related to the prefetch determination becomes complicated. However, as in this embodiment, if a big win is won, a gaming machine that always shifts to a high probability state after the big hit game is finished will make a winning decision assuming a high probability state in the pre-reading determination, and the big hit game You may comprise so that pre-reading determination can be performed for the operation hold ball generated inside.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S324) is not performed, and the processing proceeds to step S325. .

  If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and a random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 30) is acquired (step S317). The random number for jackpot determination stored in (the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S318), and the random number determination process of step S319 is performed. In this random number determination process, the “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random number determination process in step S319 is completed, the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 31) is acquired (step S320), and the special symbol determination random number stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S320). S321), the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 is performed. In this special stop symbol data creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the special stop symbol data creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S322 is completed, the start opening winning random number determination process in step S323 is then performed. In this starting opening winning random number determination process, based on the data (special symbol determination data and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the stop symbol data generation process in step S322, a prize used for generating a pending addition command to be described later. Command data (second byte: lower byte (EVENT)) is created. Details of the start opening winning random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning in step S323 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the prefetch determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the prefetch variation pattern A “hold addition command” composed of the winning command data is created (steps S324 to S325), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S326). Details of the “hold addition command” will be described later with reference to FIG. As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  Proceeding to the process of step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, variation pattern random number 1, The current value of the random number counter 2) for the variation pattern is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. In addition, as described above, when the player aims at the launch position on the normal symbol start port 37 side in the absence of the electric support, the player is aiming so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. However, it is a game that brings a disadvantage to the player that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is remarkably lowered. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no pre-reading determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. However, if the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and a special random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 30) is acquired (step S337). The jackpot determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S338), and a random number determination process is performed (step S339). In this random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the random number determination processing in step S319 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S339 is completed, the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 31) is acquired (step S340), and the special symbol determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S340). S341), special stop symbol data creation processing is performed (step S342). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “symbol lottery” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 during the special figure 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, the start opening winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 starting opening check process is performed (step S343), and a hold addition command is created based on the winning command data and the number of suspended balls (steps S344 to S345). Then, the created hold addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S346), and the special figure 2 starting port check process is exited.

(8-1-1. Random number determination process (winning winning determination process): FIG. 12)
Next, the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the random number determination process. This random number determination processing is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' processing, and here, "winning lottery (pre-winning (prefetching) winning determination)" related to prefetching determination using a random number for jackpot determination is performed. Is called.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired hit random number determination table (FIG. 30), compares the big hit determination random number value with the determination value shown in the hit random number determination table, (Step S351), a big hit determination flag and a small hit determination flag corresponding to the current gaming state are acquired (step S352). Note that the hit random number determination table referred to here is the hit random number determination table for special figure 1 of FIG. 30 (a) acquired in the process of step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check process of FIG. 11 is a special random number determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 30B acquired in the process of step S337 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-1. Per random number determination table: FIG. 30)
The hit random number determination table will be described. FIG. 30 shows a hit random number determination table. FIG. 30 (a) illustrates a random number determination table for special figure 1 and FIG. 30 (b) illustrates a random number determination table for special figure 2.

  In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)) and the big hit determination random number value (size of the big hit determination random number: 65536) The decision area (decision value) for deciding the winning (winning) type (big hit, small hit or lost) is determined in association with each other. Whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss is determined depending on whether it belongs to the determination value. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning (winning) type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “losing” on the other hand.

(T-1-1. Random number determination table for special figure 1: FIG. 30 (A))
With reference to FIG. 30A, the random number determination table for special figure 1 will be described.

(About jackpot winning)
In the special random number determination table for special figure 1 of the present embodiment, regarding whether or not the big hit, if the random number for big hit determination belongs to the range of determination values 10001 to 10165, the big hit determination flag is set in both the low probability state and the high probability state. It is “5AH”, and it is “Hot Win”. On the other hand, if the big hit determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 10166 to 11650, whether or not the winning is determined according to the big hit lottery probability state, the big hit determination flag becomes “5AH” under the high probability state, and “big hit win” is obtained. However, under the low probability state, the big hit determination flag is “00H” and “big hit is not won”. In addition, except for the determination value in which the big hit determination flag is “5AH”, “big hit is not won”. Further, the jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher than that in the high probability state, so that the jackpot is won.

(About winning small hits)
As for the success / failure of the small hit, if the random number for determining the big hit belongs to the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag becomes “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and “small winning” If it belongs to any other judgment value, it is “small winning not won”. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state. In the present embodiment, the small win winning probability is about 1/585, which is lower than the big win winning probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set equal to or higher than the winning probability of winning a jackpot.

(About losing)
If the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won. In this case, the winning judgment result is “losing”.

(T-1-2. Random number judgment table for special figure 2: FIG. 30 (b))
(8-1-2. Special stop symbol data creation process (special stop symbol data creation process when winning a prize): FIG. 13)
Next, the per random number determination table for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The special random number determination table for special figure 2 of this embodiment differs from the random number determination table for special figure 1 in the following points. In the special figure 1 hit random number determination table described above, when the big hit determination random number value is in the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag is “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, Become. However, in this special figure 2 random number determination table, there is no determination value itself for winning a small hit. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object. It should be noted that the winning probability of the jackpot in the special figure 2 random number determination table is the same as the winning probability in the special figure 1 random number determination table.

  Here, in this embodiment, the state (5AH or 00H) of the big hit determination flag acquired in the processing of step S352 is loaded (loaded) into a general-purpose register (here, A register) built in the CPU, and the small hit determination flag is set. The state (“5AH” or “00H”) is taken into another general-purpose register (D register in this case), and the random number determination process is exited with the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in the register. In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning lottery results fetched into the A register and the D register in the RAM 203 but leaves the random number determination process while holding the results in the respective registers.

  In the present embodiment, the determination result obtained in the current winning determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent special stop symbol data creating process, and this data is required thereafter. There is nothing. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the winning determination process (the winning result related to the prefetch determination), and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. The memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the random number determination process (step S319, step S339: winning lottery process in winning process) is a special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process described later (step S409 in FIG. 15 described later: fluctuation). In the winning lottery process related to the process at the start), it is used as a common processing module. However, for the data obtained in the random number determination process for the special electric accessory operation determination described later, data necessary for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and executing a jackpot game according to the jackpot type Therefore, the situation is different from the above-described random number determination process related to the prefetch determination process, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

  Next, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10 and step S342 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the special stop symbol data creation process. This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, similar to the above random number determination process. Symbol determination) ”is performed.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired symbol table selection table (FIG. 31), and the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination processing (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11), that is, the register A The symbol table (FIGS. 32 to 34: details will be described later) corresponding to the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag held in D is acquired (step S361). It should be noted that the symbol table selection table referred to here is the symbol table selection table for special symbol 1 of FIG. 31 (a) acquired in the process of step S320 during the special symbol 1 starting port check processing of FIG. 11 is the special figure 2 symbol table selection table of FIG. 31 (b) acquired in the process of step S340 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-2: Symbol table selection table: Fig. 31)
FIG. 31 shows a symbol table selection table. FIG. 31A is a diagram illustrating a special table symbol selection table for special figure 1, and FIG. 31B is a diagram illustrating a special symbol table selection table for special figure 2. FIG.

(T-2-1: Symbol table selection table for special figure 1: FIG. 31 (A))
With reference to FIG. 31 (a), the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 will be described. In the special figure 1 symbol table selection table of this embodiment, a winning lottery result and a symbol table type (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be described later are defined in association with each other. Based on the plurality of types of symbol tables, one symbol table is determined. According to the special figure 1 symbol table selection table, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 1 (FIG. 32 (a))” is used. "Is lost," Lose symbol table 1 (Fig. 33 (B)) "is determined. Details of these symbol tables will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(T-2-2: Special table 2 symbol table selection table: FIG. 31 (b))
Next, with reference to FIG. 31 (b), the special table 2 symbol table selection table will be described. In the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table, one symbol table is selected from among a plurality of types of symbol tables based on the winning lottery result, in the same manner as the configuration of the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table. It has become so. However, in the special symbol 2 winning symbol table selection table, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 2 (FIG. 32 (B))” is displayed. 33 (b)) ”is determined, and the“ small hit symbol table (FIG. 32) ”for the small hit is not included. This is because, on the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side (special symbol 2 side), “small winning” is excluded from the winning lottery object, and the small winning is not won (see FIG. 32 (see below)). ) “Big hit symbol table 2”).

  If the processing of the above step S361 is specifically described, when the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 is referred to, the winning lottery result (the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag) is “big hit ( If the big hit determination flag = 5 AH, the small hit determination flag = 00H) ”, the“ big hit symbol table 1 ”is the“ small hit (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5AH) ”. When the “small hit symbol table” is “losing (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H)”, the “lost symbol table 1” is acquired. Further, when the special table 2 symbol table selection table is referred to, when “big hit (big hit determination flag = 5 AH, small hit determination flag = 00H”), “big hit symbol table 2” is “lost: big hit When “determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H”, “losing symbol table 2” is acquired.

  Next, the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset value are acquired with reference to the symbol table acquired in the process of step S361 (step S362).

(T-3 to T-5. Symbol table: FIGS. 32 to 34)
Each symbol table will be described. FIG. 32 shows a big hit symbol table, FIG. 33 shows a small hit symbol table, and FIG. 34 shows a lost symbol table.

  In the various symbol tables of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 to 34, “special symbol determination random number value (special symbol determination random number value: 200)”, “special symbol determination data, A special stop symbol number and a determination area (determination value) for determining “variation pattern selection offset” are determined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any determination value. Depending on whether or not, special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

  The above “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and lost type). Specifically, in the case of big hit (big hit determination flag = 5 AH) In case of small hit determination flag = 00H), when the special symbol determination data is “01H”, “2R short open latent big hit”, when “02H”, “10R long open probability big hit”, “03H” Indicates “15R long open probability change big hit”. In the case of small hit (when big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5 AH), when the special symbol determination data is “01H”, “small hit A”, and when “02H”, “small” A hit B 'or "03H" indicates a' small hit C '. In the case of a loss (when the big hit determination flag = 00H, the small hit determination flag = 00H), when the special symbol determination data is “00H”, it indicates that the loss is “A to C”. This special symbol determination data is used in processing related to gaming state transition control (for example, gaming state transition preparation processing in step S411 in FIG. 15 described later) and processing related to jackpot gaming (for example, special electric accessory processing (step S60)) Data used.

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. The In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a special stop symbol number corresponding to each determination value is selected. For example, even in the case of the same 2R short-open latency probability hit, The display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the display mode of “7-segment”) may be different. The same applies to the small hit symbol table and the lost symbol table described later. In this way, even if the winning type is the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is determined by defining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the special symbol determination random number value, It is difficult to tell what kind of big hit, small hit or loser the player has won. As in this embodiment, if the behavior during the 2R latent big hit game is substantially the same as that during the small hit game, not only the mechanical operation and production of the big prize opening, but also a special To make it difficult for the player to understand the winning type from the special stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device, in order to raise the expectation of rushing into a high probability state, that is, to win the winning expectation of 2R short-open latency big hit It is valid.

  The above “variation pattern selection offset (indicated by“ offset value ”in the figure)” is offset data used when selecting a pending addition command or a variation pattern designation command, which will be described later.

(T-3. Big hit symbol table: FIG. 32)
The jackpot symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a diagram illustrating a jackpot symbol table 1 (a jackpot symbol table for special figure 1), and FIG. 32B is a diagram illustrating a jackpot symbol table 2 (a jackpot symbol table for special figure 2).

(T-3-1: jackpot symbol table 1: FIG. 32 (A))
In the jackpot symbol table 1 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number value and a determination value for determining the jackpot type are mainly associated with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value is determined. One of the big hits is determined from a plurality of types of big hits depending on which judgment value belongs to. Referring to the “judgment value” column of the jackpot symbol table 1 shown in the figure, if the random number for special symbol determination falls within the range of determination values 0 to 119, the “2R short open latent probability big hit” is won (symbol selection) Rate (symbol lottery probability): 120/200), if it falls within the range of judgment values 120 to 179, “10R long open probability change big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 60/200), range of judgment values 180 to 199 If it belongs to the category, it will be a “15R long open probability variable big hit” win (symbol selection rate: 20/200), and any one of the big hits will be determined with a predetermined symbol selection rate. . Similarly, the small hit symbol table (FIG. 33) described later is such that the small hit type (small hits A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate. Similarly, in FIG. 34, the loss type (loss A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate.

(T-3-2: jackpot symbol table 2: FIG. 32 (b))
The jackpot symbol table 2 of this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1 described above, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when it falls within the range of the judgment value 0 to 79, it becomes the “10R long open probability variation big hit” winning (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 80/200) and belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199. In this case, “15R long open probability change big hit” is won (symbol selection rate: 120/200), and “2R short open latent big hit” is a winning configuration. The symbol lottery based on the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. That is, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1.

(T-4: Small hits design table: FIG. 33)
Next, the small hit symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. As in the configuration of the big hit symbol table described above, the small hit symbol table of the present embodiment depends on whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values). Any one of A to C), special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

(T-5: Lost symbol table: Fig. 34)
Next, the lost symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 (a) illustrates a lost symbol table 1 (a lost symbol table for special figure 1), and FIG. 34 (b) illustrates a lost symbol table 2 (a lost symbol table for special figure 2).

  In each of the lost symbol tables 1 and 2 of the present embodiment, whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. Thus, the loss type (any of the loss A to C), the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset are determined. As shown in the figure, the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost A to C. Accordingly, even if the special symbol determination random number is the same value, the case where the lost symbol table 1 is referred to and the case where the lost symbol table 2 is referred to may be different in the type of loss that is won.

  In the process of step S362, regarding the various data obtained from the above-described symbol table (the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset), the special symbol determination data is In the A register, the special stop symbol number is loaded in the B register, and the variation pattern selection offset is loaded in the C register. In this state, the process exits the special stop symbol data creation process and proceeds to the start opening winning random number determination process (if the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. 10 is in progress, the process proceeds to step S323, and the special figure 2 in FIG. If the start port check process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 343). That is, the CPU 201 exits the special stop symbol data creation process while retaining the data fetched in the A register, B register, and C register in each register without storing them in the RAM 203.

  Various data of the judgment results (design lottery results in the pre-reading judgment) obtained in this special stop symbol data creation process will be used immediately in the subsequent starting port winning random number judgment process, and then this data will be required There is no. Therefore, there is no problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is not stored in the RAM 203 but is held in the register. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process and eliminates the need for a separate storage area for storing the determination result, thus reducing the memory capacity. , Control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S342 in FIG. 11: symbol lottery process in the winning process) is a stop symbol creation process (step in FIG. 15 to be described later). In S410: symbol lottery process of the fluctuation start process), it is used as a common processing module. However, since the data obtained in the stop symbol creation process described later is data necessary for determining the variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and executing the jackpot game according to the jackpot type, pre-read determination The situation is different from the above-described special stop symbol data creation processing related to the processing, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

(8-1-3. Random number determination process at start-up winning prize: FIG. 14)
Next, the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10, step S343 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the start opening winning random number determination process. This start-point winning random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (steps S319 and S339) and the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342). Then, a process of creating winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” to be described later is performed. A look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) is designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process.

  This starting port winning random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as processes for determining the winning command data (EVENT) for designating the pre-reading variation pattern.

(A) Referring to the winning command distribution table selection table (FIG. 36), the winning command distribution table (FIGS. 37 and 38) according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). “Winning command distribution table determination process (steps S371 to S373)”,
(B) Based on the winning command distribution table, “winning command data determination processing (steps S373 to S374)” for determining winning command data (lower byte side of the pending addition command (EVENT)) is configured. The

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” functions as a “variation pattern selection mode” and is data for identifying the current gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 50, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal A”, and when it is “01H”, “normal B”. "02H" indicates "normal C", and "03H" indicates "probability change state (probability change)". This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above. Hereinafter, the processing methods (a) and (b) will be specifically described.

(A) Winning command distribution table determination process (steps S371 to S373)
In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first corrects the “variation pattern selection offset value” obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342) (step S371: offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection). . Here, as data for selecting a winning command distribution table from the winning command distribution table selection table of FIG. 36, a predetermined correction is made for the offset value for selecting the variation pattern obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process. Processing is performed to acquire a new variation pattern selection offset value.

  With reference to FIG. 35, the winning correction pattern selecting offset correction processing in step S371 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection, and FIG. 35 (a) shows the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol data creation process (hereinafter referred to as “winning winning pattern”). (Hereinafter referred to as “offset value before correction”) and a list of the contents thereof, and FIG. A list is shown.

  In FIG. 35 (a), for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “00H”, the winning lottery and the symbol lottery for the special figure 1 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 1” in the figure) are performed. The prefetch determination result based on this indicates “losing A”. In addition, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the pre-read determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery for the special figure 2 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 2” in the figure) is “losing A” In addition, the variable pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol data creation process and its contents are shown (see the column of “offset value” in the symbol table shown in FIGS. 32 to 34). In the figure, “Special Figure 1” indicates the special figure 1 operation holding ball side, and “Special Figure 2” indicates the special figure 2 operation holding ball side.

  Incidentally, the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning shown in FIG. 35 (a) is a partly skipped value for the following reason.

  If the variation of the pre-reading notice effect is to be abundant, not only the big hit lottery result but also the random number for the variation pattern is used because the rough content of the variation pattern at the start of the variation is specified by the look-ahead variation pattern. It is necessary to determine the look-ahead variation pattern, and a simple control process that is common to both is desired. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, the random determination process (steps S319 and S339) at the time of winning a prize is changed to the random determination process for determining the operation of a special electric instrument at the start of fluctuation ( It is used as a common processing module in step S409 of FIG. 15 described later, and special stop symbol data creation processing (steps S322 and S342) in winning process is special stop symbol creation processing in variation start process (described later). 15 in step S410) as a common processing module. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset obtained in the winning process (offset value before the correction process in step S371) and the variation pattern selection offset value obtained in the fluctuation start process (before the correction process in step S441 described later) The offset value takes the same value as the offset value having the same designated content (see the table before correction processing in FIG. 35A and FIG. 42A described later).

  In addition, when there are many variations of effects during the symbol variation display game, it is necessary to increase the types of variation patterns of special symbols, so the variation pattern selection offset value used in the variation start processing is Although the contents are in consideration of the number of operation-reserved balls (see a table after correction processing in FIG. 42 (B) described later), the number of operation-reserved balls is not taken into consideration at the time of prefetch determination. This is because the number of the operation suspending balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily match the number of the operation suspending at the start of the variation, and therefore, the content of the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation cannot be prefetched. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset before correction processing at the time of winning a prize or at the start of variation creates a vacant number that takes into account the number of balls that are reserved for operation and has a partial jump value (operation hold at the start of variation) The offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 06H corresponding to the number of balls are used as empty numbers).

  Although the details will be described later, the winning command distribution table selection table is configured so that the winning command distribution table can be selected using continuous addresses in order to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program. Therefore, in this embodiment, the following correction processing is performed on the offset value before correction at the time of winning so that the address search of the winning command distribution table based on the winning command distribution table selection table is facilitated, By correcting to a continuous value, the processing when selecting the winning command distribution table is simplified, and the control burden is reduced.

  In the correction process in step S371, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning exceeds “07H” (when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning> 07H), “07H” is calculated from the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning. Is subtracted, and when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning does not exceed “07H” (if the pre-correction offset value at winning time ≦ 07H), the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is changed to “00H”.

  A new variation pattern selection offset value (offset value after winning winning correction) obtained by this correction processing and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, this offset value is used to select a target winning command distribution table from the winning command distribution table selection table (steps S372 to S373).

  When the correction process in step S371 is completed, a winning command distribution table selection table is acquired (step S372), and the corrected variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution are referred to with reference to the winning command distribution table selection table. A winning command distribution table corresponding to the designated number (Tcode) is acquired (step S373).

(T-6. Winning command distribution table selection table: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 shows a winning command distribution table selection table. This winning command distribution table selection table is a table for selecting a look-ahead variation pattern determination table (winning command distribution tables a1 to a6 in FIG. 37, winning command distribution tables h1 to h9 in FIG. 38), It is treated as included in the concept of the pre-reading variation pattern determination table in a broad sense. In the winning command distribution table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning command distribution tables associated with the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) are defined. Specifically, one winning command distribution table is determined from among a plurality of types of winning command distribution tables based on the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). It has become.

  The winning command distribution table selection table stores the address value of the winning command distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). In order to simplify the program, the data structure uses continuous addresses so as to correspond to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern. In short, in the winning command distribution table selection table, an address for designating a winning command distribution table corresponding to a specific winning type (in this embodiment, loss A), that is, corresponding to the offset value “00H”. Are stored in the ROM 202 in such a form that the winning command distribution table is sequentially arranged in a form not related to the number of pending operations, starting from the first head address.

  In the selection of the winning command distribution table, first, a winning command distribution table selection table corresponding to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is selected, and a winning command distribution table corresponding to the variation pattern selection offset value is selected. select. That is, in the winning command distribution table selection table selected for each variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the top address value that defines the winning command distribution table is described. Addition processing for adding a variation pattern selection offset value (here, an offset value obtained in the correction processing in step S371 described later) is performed, a relative address with respect to the start address is obtained, and the address of the target winning command distribution table By specifying a value, a winning command distribution table can be selected. For example, when the head address is 1000 and the variation pattern selection offset value is 01H, the variation pattern selection offset value “01H” is added to the head address to obtain the target table existing at the address 1001.

(B) Winning command data determination process (steps S374 to S375)
After acquiring the winning command distribution table selection table in the process of step S372, the CPU 201 acquires the variation pattern random value 1 (step S374) and refers to the winning command distribution table to determine the variation pattern random value. “Winning command data” corresponding to 1 is acquired (step S375).

(T-7. Winning command distribution table: FIGS. 37 and 38)
The winning command distribution table will be described. FIG. 37 shows a winning prize command distribution table selected at the time of winning, and FIG. 38 shows a lost winning command distribution table selected at the time of losing.

  Referring to FIG. 37, the winning prize command distribution table of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of winning prize command distribution tables “a1 to a6”, and the lost winning command distribution table includes a plurality of types of lost games. The winning command distribution table “h1 to h9” is included. In these winning command distribution tables, variation pattern random value 1 (size of variation pattern random value 1: 239) and winning command data (EVENT) are defined in association with each other. One lot of winning command data is determined from a plurality of types of winning command data by lottery using the random number value 1 for patterns. The “variation pattern random value 1” is a random number that is also used when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation (see the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) described later: see FIG. 15). In the present embodiment, by using the same random number value for variation pattern 1 in the processing related to prefetch determination and the processing related to determination of the variation pattern at the start of variation, the variation pattern at the beginning of variation that will be determined in the future It is possible to determine in advance what type of variation pattern is determined in advance.

  Note that “prefetch variation pattern determination content” in the drawing indicates the content of the prefetch variation pattern designated by the winning command data (EVENT). Also, the Arabic numerals in the figure indicate the distribution value (the size of the determination area) (the same notation in FIGS. 38 and 44 to 45 described later). In other words, winning command data “0EH” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected at a ratio of 50/239 (distribution value / lottery area size).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown in the figure, but actually, a determination area (determination) for determining the winning command data (EVENT) according to the random number 1 for the variation pattern. Value) is determined, and the winning command data (EVENT) is determined depending on which judgment value the variation pattern random value 1 belongs to. The relationship between the distribution value and the determination value shown in the figure is as follows. For example, the win command distribution table “a2” will be described as a representative example. When the distribution value is referred to from the position where the distribution value is first described when viewed in the column direction from the front to the bottom of the drawing, the distribution value is “ 50 ”,“ 80 ”,“ 39 ”,“ 70 ”, which are described in this order. The content of the variation pattern random value 1 is in the range of the judgment values 0 to 49 (the distribution value“ 50 ”above). The command “0EH” for designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and it belongs to the range of judgment values 50 to 129 (corresponding to the description column for the distribution value “80”). If the command “0FH” for specifying “strong SP reach A” is selected and belongs to the range of the judgment values 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39” above), “weak SP reach B” is selected. The designated command “10H” is selected, and the judgment value 169 If it belongs to 238 range (corresponding to the description column of the sorting value "80") means the contents of the command "11H" to specify the "strength SP reach B" is selected. Similarly, for example, if the lose prize command distribution table “h2” is described as a representative example, the distribution values are described in the order of “150” and “89”. If it belongs to the range (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “150”), the command “04H” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and the range of the judgment values 150 to 238 (the distribution value “89”) is selected. ”Means that the command“ 05H ”designating“ strong SP reach A ”is selected. 44 to 45, which will be described later, have the same notation of “selection rate”, but as described above, a determination value corresponding to the random number 1 or 2 for the variation pattern is determined (this) Is omitted to avoid duplication).

  The winning winning command distribution table includes the following items as winning winning command data for designating a pre-reading fluctuation pattern at the time of winning. Command data for specifying “2R short open latency / small hit win 1” used in “Normal A” or “Normal B” to specify 2R short open latency big win or small win win Command data specified by “2R short open latency / small win winning 2” used in “normal C”, “2R short open latency / small hit winning 3” used in “probability change state” 3 Command data for specifying "." In addition, the 10R and 15R long-open probability variable big wins are designated as “Weak SP Reach A”, “Weak SP Reach B”, “Strong SP Reach A” and “Strong” used during “Normal A” or “Normal B”. Each command data designating “SP reach B”, command data designating “special reach” used in “normal C”, command data designating “reaching during probability change” used in “probability change state”, etc. Is included.

  The lost winning command distribution table includes the following as lost winning command data for designating the pre-reading variation pattern at the time of the lost. Specify "weak SP reach A", "weak SP reach B", "strong SP reach A", and "strong SP reach B" used during "normal A" or "normal B" as the reach fluctuation pattern. Command data specifying “special reach” used during “normal C”, winning command data specifying “reach during probability change” used during “probability change state”, and the like. In the case of “losing”, unlike the case of “winning”, the possibility of winning a big hit is zero, and therefore, there is a loss fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern) indicating no reach. The command data specifying “normal fluctuation” used during “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, Command data specifying “normal fluctuation (2 s)” used in “status” is included.

  The loss winning command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)” in the figure is a reach fluctuation pattern whether the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a normal fluctuation pattern or not at the time of prefetch determination. This is command data that specifies that it is unknown. This is because the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of suspended balls in the variation pattern determination stage at the beginning of variation (the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 of FIG. 19), at the time of the prefetch determination, the number of the operation suspension balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily coincide with the number of the operation suspension at the start of the variation, and therefore, it is not possible to make a prefetch determination of the variation pattern at the start of the exact variation. . For this reason, in the pre-reading variation pattern determination stage, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of suspended balls, and when the variation pattern random value 1 is “210 to 238”, the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern. Or the reach variation pattern cannot be determined (see FIGS. 43 and 45 described later). Specifically, in the case of the loss A at the start of the change, unlike the case of the prefetch determination, one of the first steps H1 to H4 of the loss change pattern distribution table is selected according to the number of operation suspension balls at the start of the change. There is a possibility (see the column of offset values 00H to 03H in FIG. 43, H1 to H4 in FIG. 45), and when H1 is selected, the determination value “0 to 209 (selectivity 210/239)” is “normal” Fluctuation 1 (12 s) ', determination value “210 to 238 (selection rate 29/239)” is selected as “N reach”, and when H2 is selected, determination value “0 to 219 (selection rate 220/239) ) ”Is selected as“ normal fluctuation 1 (12 s) ”, and“ N reach ”is selected as the determination value“ 220 to 238 (selectivity 19/239) ”, and when H3 is selected, the determination value“ 0 to 229 ( "Selectivity 230/239)" 2 (8 s) ′, when “N reach” is selected in the determination values “230 to 238 (selection rate 9/239)” and H4 is selected, “normal fluctuation 3 ( This is because only “3s)” is selected. This problem occurs particularly in the case of Loss A, but the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in the case of Loss A of the present embodiment is mainly “normal fluctuation” or “N reach” with a relatively low expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the “normal fluctuation” is exceptionally determined without determining the above “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)”. In the present embodiment, if the determination value is “210 to 238”, the possibility of “N reach” increases. Therefore, at the time of the prefetch determination, “N reach” is used in the range of the determination value “210 to 238”. You may judge.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 executes the pre-reading notice effect with the lose prize command data “02H” designating “normal variation” and the lose prize command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)”. If the probabilities (prefetching notice lottery winning probability) are the same, or if a predetermined prefetching notice effect is made to appear with the same probability on both sides, the contents of the prefetching notice effect and the notice effect in the symbol variation display game There is no contradiction to the content. However, in this case, the appearance rate and the content of the production of the same pre-reading preview performance pre-reading announcement are the same for both, and the variation of the production is limited. Therefore, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice effect is different between the lose prize command data “02H” designating “normal variation” and the lose prize command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)”. It is preferable. For example, in the case of the lost winning command data “03H” for designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)” so that the content of the pre-reading notice effect and the content of the notice effect during the symbol variation display game are not different from each other, Predictive notice effect with relatively low expectation of winning a big hit (for example, setting the probability that the hold icon changes to blue higher than the probability that it changes to other colors (yellow, green, red)) Is preferred.

  Returning to step S375 again. In the process of step S375, the winning command data (EVENT) obtained from the winning command distribution table is taken into the C register, and in this state, the start opening winning random number determination process is exited. . In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning command data (EVENT) fetched in the C register in the RAM 203, but leaves the starting opening winning random number determination process while holding it in the register.

  The determination result (winning command data) obtained in the current start opening winning random number determination process is immediately used in the process of creating a subsequent pending addition command, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the predetermined register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process at the start opening prize is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process at the start-up winning prize, and it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area for the RAM 203, thereby reducing the memory capacity and the control burden. Can do.

(C-1: Hold addition command: FIG. 39)
Next, the hold addition command will be described. When the CPU 201 finishes the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11), the winning command data on the lower byte side obtained in the starting opening winning random number determining process is continued. Based on (EVENT) and the winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side based on the current number of pending balls for operation, a “hold addition command” is created and stored in the RAM 203 without being stored in the RAM 203. (See steps S324 to S326 in FIG. 10 and steps 344 to S346 in FIG. 11).

  The reason why the pending addition command is not stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. After the hold addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, it is only used when the “pre-reading notice effect” relating to the current operation holding ball appears on the effect control unit 24 side. Yes, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) described later. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the start opening check process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is exited without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203. In this embodiment, various types of data obtained by a series of 'look-ahead determination' processing related to winning time processing such as winning determination processing, special stop symbol data creation processing, and start opening winning random number determination processing are stored in the RAM 203 one by one. By setting the start port check process to be completed without doing so, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

  FIG. 39 shows a list of the hold addition commands. As shown in the figure, the pending addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH (B6H to B9H is a special symbol 1) created according to the number of balls to be held and the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). BBH to BEH correspond to 1 to 4 actuated balls of special symbol 2, respectively))), and at the start opening winning random number determination process of step S323 The lower byte (the second byte (EVENT) “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)”) is formed. Therefore, the hold addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S317 to S323) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, prefetch variation pattern information. In the present embodiment, it is possible to create a hold addition command in a form including “information on the number of reserved balls for operation and special symbol type” and “information on the look-ahead variation pattern” and transmit this to the effect control unit 24. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a first hold addition command including information on the number of operating balls to be held and a special symbol type (special stop symbol number) or a hit type (special symbol determination data), and a second hold addition including information on a look-ahead variation pattern The information may be divided into commands, and each piece of information may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 using separate effect control commands.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to appear to indicate that a winning has been made at the start opening, regardless of whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. it can.

  In addition, even when a new winning is made when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a holding addition command at the time of overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted. This OF pending addition command is also composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte (MODE) is “B5H (corresponds to special symbol 1)” or “BAH (corresponds to special symbol 2)”, and the lower byte (EVENT) is an overflow prize. “00H” is designated. The lower byte may be created during the random number determination process at the time of starting entrance prize. Also, “OF data acquisition process” for acquiring data for overflow winning (lower byte “00H”) once between the processes of steps S311 and S312 of FIG. 10 and the processes of steps S331 and S332 of FIG. If it is an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “YES”, or the determination result in step S332 is “YES”), the process proceeds to step S325 or S345 as it is to create the “OF hold addition command”, If it is not an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “NO”, or the determination result in step S332 is “NO”), the processing route for performing step S313 or S333 is entered, and the data (EVENT generated in the OF data acquisition process) ) “00H”) at the beginning of step S323 or S343 By rewriting the data acquired in the random number determination process at the mouth winning it may be configured to create a pending addition command purposes.

  The OF hold addition command is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”, but can be configured to produce the following effects. For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned OF hold addition command, on the condition that there is a “big hit (may include a small hit)” among the current operation hold balls. You may comprise so that the notice effect (In-game notice effect on hold at the time of OF winning) can be shown. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, On the condition that there is an item that will be a “big hit (may include a small win)” (determining whether to make a notification through a predetermined lottery) It is also possible to include an on-hold notice effect means. Furthermore, on the condition that the result of the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when winning OF) May be configured to be able to appear. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery). Such a notice effect is similar to the prize effect that appears when an overflow prize is generated, but in that the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been proactively notified. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 15)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S400). If the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is not zero (step S400: NO), Proceeding to the processing of S402, the processing at the time of starting the change (steps S402 to S417) for the operation holding ball used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S400: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401). If the number is not zero (step S401: NO), the process proceeds to step S402, and the process (steps S402 to S417) related to the start of variation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball to be used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing in steps S400 and S401, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding sphere and the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding sphere is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S400 and S401 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation reservation balls of both the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation reservation ball” Become. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is waiting and there is no hold storage state, and the demonstration control screen 24 is informed that the state has entered this state. Switch to display control. Therefore, if “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H)”. This “standby (00H)” is an operation status indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. If the special symbol operation status is “waiting (01H)” when the determination process of step 417 is passed (see step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 21A described later), the special symbol operation status is set to “standby”. "(00H)" (special symbol operation status 00H is stored: step S418), and a "demonstration display command" for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419). ), The special symbol variation start process is exited. If the effect control unit 24 does not receive an effect control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is not performed for a certain period of time. It is assumed that a state (standby waiting state) has occurred, and the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demonstration screen display” to notify that the game standby state is in progress.

  If the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls or special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S400: NO or S401: NO), to start the variation of the special symbol for the operation reservation ball for the current variation display Such processing (steps S402 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S402-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S400, it is the process which made the special figure 2 operation holding ball object, and determination of said step S401 " If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  When proceeding to step S402, 1 is subtracted from the number of suspended balls in operation (the number of suspended balls on the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1: step S402), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S403).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S404). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S405), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S406). In the processing in steps S405 to S406, the hold data (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, variation pattern random number) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. 1 and the variation pattern random number 2) are read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (hold 2 storage area, reserved) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) The storage data stored in the storage area 3 and the storage area 4 are stored in the storage areas corresponding to “n−1” (step S405), and the storage area 4 is cleared (step S406). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → hold 2 storage area, hold 4 storage area → hold 3 storage area) and overwrite each other to provide an empty area in the hold 4 storage area (if no new active hold ball is generated, processing in step S406) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, the process proceeds to the generation / transmission process (step S407) of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number command. In the variation pattern allocation designation number command creation / transmission process (step S407), processing for transmitting information related to the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) for specifying the gaming state to the effect control unit 24 side is performed. Specifically, the current variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is acquired, and the variation including information that can identify the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (game state data information that can identify the gaming state). A pattern allocation designation number command (first control command) is created. Then, prior to the execution of the decorative symbol variation display operation in the liquid crystal display device 36, a variation pattern distribution designation number command is transmitted. On the condition that the production control unit 24 has received this variation pattern assignment designation number command and a variation pattern designation command (created in a special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) described later), these are included in these. The consistency of the current gaming state based on the information to be determined is determined (details will be described later in the variation pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 28).

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). The “remaining short time number command” is used when the remaining time short number information is notified on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. Note that the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process” (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, that is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. This is a process that works in the same way as “see FIG. 12 showing the details”, but here, unlike “winning lottery” in “look-ahead determination”, the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is targeted The “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change”. Details of the special electric accessory actuating determination random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creation process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process of step S409, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is “special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, its details), which is one of the“ prefetch determination ”processes in that“ design lottery ”is performed. 13) ”, but here, unlike“ symbol drawing ”in“ look-ahead determination ”, the target is a suspended ball used for the current variable display operation. This is a “symbol drawing” in “determination at the start of change”. Details of the special symbol stop symbol creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Based on the data set here, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation processing, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are obtained. Use this to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol for the active ball to be used for the current variation display operation, and then include variation pattern information that can identify the variation pattern content as a production control command A pattern designation command (second control command) is created. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S323 to S325, steps S343 to S345 in FIG. 11 (see FIG. 14). However, here, a special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is shown. A variation pattern, that is, a variation pattern at the start of variation is determined. Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the created variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S413).

  Next, 5AH (ON state) is stored in a special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) designating that the change display is being performed (step S414). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410, a decorative symbol designation command (third control command) is created (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). . The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating the big hit type, the small hit type, and the loss type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, “BBH” is set on the upper byte (MODE) side if the special symbol on the variable side is special symbol 1, “BCH” is set on the special symbol 2, and the winning side is selected on the lower byte (EVENT) side. “01H” to “03H” when the type is Loss A to C, “04H” to “06H” when the small hits A to C are, “07H” when the big hit is “07H”, 10R The long open probability variable big hit is set to “08H”, and the 15R long open probability variable big hit is set to “09H”.

  Then, as the change start setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S417). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S59) is exited and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S60) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (winning determination process at the start of change): FIG. 16)
Next, the special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process (step S409) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in FIG.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 30 (a)) or the random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 30 (b)) based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. ) Is acquired (step S421), and the jackpot determination random number stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired (step S422).

  Next, a random number determination process is performed (step S423: random number determination process of variation start process). Here, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are acquired based on the big hit determination random number value and the current big hit lottery probability state with reference to the hit random number determination table acquired in the process of step S421. Then, this random number determination process is exited while the acquired state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag are taken into the registers (A register and D register).

  In other words, the random number determination process in step S423 is “random number determination process in winning process (random number determination process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S319 in FIG. 10), random determination process in special figure 2 start opening check process” (Step S339 in FIG. 11)) ”. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. In this way, the random number determination process of the winning process and the random number determination process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, so that when independent processes are provided (in separate programs) The amount of programs and the amount of memory can be reduced more than the description), and the control burden can be reduced.

  In particular, in the “gaming machine with a prefetch function” that generates a prefetch notice effect and enhances the gameability as in the present embodiment, the program amount is not increased due to an increase in processing related to the prefetch determination. A situation can occur that does not. However, for gaming machines that are installed in pachinko parlors, specifically, for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Act on Regulations on Customs Business and Optimization of Business, etc. And the rules relating to the type verification, etc., restrict the program capacity of the ROM mounted on the main board (in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20) that controls the overall game operation (the table attached to the rule). Third, technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (related to Article 6), and the reduction of program capacity are important.

  After exiting the random number determination process in step S423, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in each register are stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S424). The reason why the data obtained by the random number determination process in step S423 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag) obtained in the random number determination process of the special electric utility object operation determination random number determination process is not used immediately and is not necessary thereafter, but a special symbol later. This is because the data is necessary for the variation pattern creation process (step S412) and the special electric accessory process (step S60). When the process of step S424 is completed, the process exits the special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process and proceeds to the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) of FIG.

(8-3-2. Special stop symbol creation process (variation start special stop symbol determination process): FIG. 17)
Next, the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the special stop symbol creation process of FIG. 15. In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first selects the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table based on the special symbol operation confirmation data (see FIG. 31 (A)). ) Or the special figure 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 31B) is acquired (step S425).

  Next, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired (step S426), and the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination processing for operation determination of the special electric accessory in step S409, that is, the big hit determination flag And a small hit determination flag are acquired (step S427).

  Next, a special stop symbol data creation process is performed (step S428: special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process). In this special stop symbol data creation processing, the symbol table corresponding to the winning lottery result of the random determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination with reference to the symbol table selection table acquired in step S425 (see FIGS. 32 to 34). And the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to the special symbol determination random number acquired in step S426 are acquired with reference to the symbol table. Then, with the acquired special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset in the registers (A register, B register, and C register), the special stop symbol data creation processing is exited.

  The special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is “special stop symbol data creation process in winning process (special stop symbol data creation process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S322 in FIG. 10), special figure 2 start opening”. The processing content is the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S342 in FIG. 11)) of the check processing. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. As described above, the special stop symbol data creation process of the winning process and the special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, thereby providing separate and independent processes (separately) This can contribute to a reduction in the amount of programs and the amount of memory rather than a separate program). In the present embodiment, in addition to the random number determination processing in step S423, the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is also configured to be used as a processing module common to the winning time processing, so further program amount and This contributes to a reduction in the amount of memory and can reduce the control burden.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is exited, the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset stored in each register are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (step S429). The RAM 203 is provided with a dedicated storage area for storing these data (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region, variation pattern selection offset storage region).

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the special stop symbol data generation processing of the special stop symbol generation processing is the random number determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination in step S409. Similar to the data obtained in the above, it is not data that is immediately used and is unnecessary thereafter, but is required in the later special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) and the special electric accessory process (step S60). Because it is data. When the process of step S429 is completed, the process exits the special stop symbol creation process and proceeds to the game state transition preparation process (step S411) of FIG.

(8-3-3. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 18)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first acquires a jackpot determination flag and determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), a big hit gaming state transition table selection table is acquired (step S432).

  Next, referring to the acquired jackpot gaming state transition table selection table, a jackpot gaming state transition table (FIG. 51) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired. (Step S433), the data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (Step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the process of step S509 during the jackpot end process of FIG. 22 described later, and stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas and counter storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). Stored. When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) of FIG. In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The middle small hit process (see step S504 in FIG. 22) is performed.

(T-8. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 40)
FIG. 40 shows a jackpot gaming state transition table selection table. The jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables (“JTTBL-B1”, “JTTBL-B2”) associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. ": Refer to FIG. 41 described later). Specifically, based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, any one of the big hit gaming state transition tables is determined. ing.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 50, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no power support, low probability)” is set to “01H "" Indicates a latent state (without electric support, high accuracy) ", and" 02H "indicates" probability change state (with electric support, high accuracy) ". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-9. Game state transition table for jackpot: FIG. 41)
FIG. 41 shows the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state transition table. The jackpot gaming state transition table of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-1” and “JTTBL-2”. In these jackpot game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups are specified for designating game states to be transitioned after the jackpot game. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the big hit game is determined. In this embodiment, “JTTBL-B1” is a gaming state transition table for shifting to a “probability change state” and “JTTBL-B2” is a “latency probability state”. The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set the normal symbol short time state flag. The “normal symbol short-time flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the normal symbol short-time function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and is the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “ordinary symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time-short state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time-short function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game), that is, the “special symbol time reduction state”. It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. It is a counter for counting. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state that is in the electric support state is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 21B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is game state data for specifying the game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203, and this variation pattern allocation designation number is changed when the gaming state is changed. (Steps S481, S486, and S490 in the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 21B), the game state transition preparation process (S411 in FIG. 15, S434 in FIG. 18), the special electric accessory management process (FIG. 22), etc.).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the present embodiment, for example, when “small hit C” or “2R short open latency probability change big hit” is won, the game state transition specified number of times of “normal C” to “normal A” is 30 times. Is set.

(8-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern creation processing (variation pattern creation processing at the start of variation): FIG. 19)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG.

  This special symbol variation pattern creation processing is configured by processing (steps S441 to S449) for determining and creating a variation pattern designation command for determining a variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) of a special symbol.

In the process of determining the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the special symbol,
(A) Referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table (see FIG. 43), the first step of the variation pattern distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) (FIG. 44). , Refer to FIG. 45), “variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443)”;
(B) With reference to the first hierarchy of the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the fluctuation start command data 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper byte side (MODE) data of the fluctuation pattern designation command) and the fluctuation pattern distribution "Fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)" for determining the minute table second hierarchy (see FIGS. 46 and 47);
(C) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, variation start command data 2 (lower byte (EVENT) data of variation pattern designation command) corresponding to variation pattern random number 2 and variation time table (Variation pattern determination processing (steps S446 to S447)) for determining (not shown);
(D) “Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448) for determining the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time table,
(E) A “variation pattern designation command creation process (step S449)” for creating a variation pattern designation command based on the variation start command data 1 and the variation start command data 2 is included.

  Although the details will be described later, the “variation pattern distribution table selection table” is used when the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” is determined. The “variation pattern distribution table first layer” is used when determining the variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second layer. The “variation pattern distribution table second layer” is used when determining the variation start command data 2 and the variation time table. The “variation time table” is a variation time (variable display operation time) of a special symbol. ) Is used when determining.

  The “variation start command data 1” designates a “basic pattern” (including whether or not a hit is lost), which is the gist (base) of a special symbol variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation). Yes, it is data on the upper byte side (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command. The “variation start command data 2” is for designating the “detail pattern” which is the specific content of the basic pattern, and is data on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the variation pattern designation command. . Therefore, the “variation pattern designation command” for designating the variation pattern at the start of variation is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of “variation start command data 1 (MODE)” and “variation start command data 2 (EVENT)”. Is done. When this change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the change pattern at the start of change (the change pattern of the special symbol). Here, the above-mentioned “basic pattern” refers to a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP”) in which a plurality of types of variation patterns are focused on the characteristics of the variation mode and grouped together. “Reach A” type, “weak SP reach B” type, etc.), and “detailed pattern” means a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP reach A1 to A1” included in the basic pattern (variation pattern type)). A3 ”and“ variation patterns such as “weak SP reach B1 to B3”). Note that “change start command data 1 (MODE)” of the present embodiment is the same value “A0H” regardless of the change pattern type in the case of loss, for example (see FIG. 34). According to the combination with “start command data 2 (EVENT)”, the hit and the difference and the variation pattern type are specified. In other words, “variation start command data 1 (MODE)” may also have a role as data that can specify a basic pattern, or a specific big hit (2R short open latency probability change big hit or small like this embodiment). For example, “A1H” in the case of “winning”, “A2H” in the case of other big hits, “A0H” in the case of losing, etc.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, an outline of a procedure for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation in the present embodiment will be described.

  The CPU 201 determines the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” by using the “variation pattern distribution table selection table”, and then refers to the “variation pattern distribution table first layer” to obtain the random number 1 for the variation pattern. The “variation pattern type (basic pattern)” is determined by the lottery process used (steps S441 to S445). At this time, the “variation pattern distribution table second layer” for determining the “variation pattern type (detailed pattern)” is also determined.

  Next, referring to the “floating pattern distribution table second layer”, the “variation pattern type” included in the variation pattern type is determined by lottery processing using the random number 2 for variation pattern (steps S446 to S447). . In other words, in the present embodiment, a hierarchical process having a hierarchical structure such as the first hierarchy and the second hierarchy and using a hierarchical process executed in order from the first hierarchy is used to sequentially determine a plurality of types of random numbers for variation patterns. As a result, the target fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is determined.

  In the present embodiment, “two-level processing” is shown in which “variation pattern type” is determined in the first layer, and “variation pattern type” that is the specific content is determined in the second layer. However, when n (2 ≦ n) fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired, an n-layer process may be executed. For example, when three types of random numbers 1 to 3 for the variation pattern are acquired, in the first hierarchy, the variation pattern type higher than the variation pattern type of the present embodiment (for example, “weak SP”). The 'weak SP reach A' type and the 'strong SP reach B' type are combined in the same system. The “strong SP reach” type or the like collected as the fluctuation pattern type is determined, and in the second hierarchy, the fluctuation pattern type (for example, “weak SP reach” type included in the higher level fluctuation pattern type is determined. If so, the “weak SP reach A” type and the “weak SP reach B” type) are determined, and in the third layer, the type of variation pattern included in the variation pattern type determined in the second layer It is possible to adopt a "three-hierarchical processing," such as determining the. Such a hierarchical process is effective when the types of variation patterns are to be abundant and the processing becomes complicated if only one type of variation pattern random number is determined. When predicting a variation pattern at the start of variation in the prefetch determination, the outline of the variation pattern type can be determined using the same variation pattern random number (variation pattern random value 1) as in this embodiment. Is also effective.

  The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way is transmitted from the main control unit 20 side to the effect control unit 24 side by a “variation pattern designation command” that allows the content to be specified. On the side of the effect control unit 24, the main effect scenario developed during the current symbol variation display game is determined based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command. Hereinafter, the processing methods (A) to (E) will be specifically described.

(A) Fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443)
In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first corrects the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol creation processing in step S410 (step S441: variation start selection variation pattern selection offset correction processing). Here, it is obtained in the special stop symbol creation process as data for selecting the first level of the variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 44 and 45) from the later-described variation pattern distribution table selection table (FIG. 43). A predetermined correction process is performed on the obtained variation pattern selection offset value, and a process of acquiring a new variation pattern selection offset value is performed.

  As already described, the variation pattern selection offset value before the correction processing in step S441 shown in FIG. 42 (a) (offset value before correction at the time of variation start) is performed in the winning time processing shown in FIG. 35 (a). It takes the same value as the obtained variation pattern selection offset value (offset value before correction at the time of winning), but when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation, this value is used to determine the variation pattern selection offset value according to the number of suspended balls. It is necessary to correct it. The processing related to this correction is the variation start time variation pattern selection offset correction processing in step S411.

  With reference to FIG. 42, the offset correction processing for selecting a variation pattern at the start of variation in step S441 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the “variation start time variation pattern selection offset correction process” in step S441. FIG. 42 (a) shows the special stop symbol creation process (step S410 in FIG. 15). A list of fluctuation pattern selection offset values (hereinafter referred to as “offset values before correction at the start of fluctuation”) and their contents are shown in FIG. And a list of the contents thereof.

  In FIG. 42 (a), for example, when the offset value before correction at the start of change is “00H”, the winning lottery at the start of change (step S409 in FIG. 15) and the symbol lottery ( The determination result based on (Step S410 in FIG. 15) is “Lose A”, and the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls at the start of the fluctuation indicates “0” (in the figure, “hold 0” to “hold 4” are Indicates the number of active balls at the start of the change) Further, for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is “losing A”, Special figure 2 The number of reserved balls for operation is “0”, and the offset value for variation pattern selection obtained by the special stop symbol creation process and its contents are shown (the symbol table shown in FIGS. 32 to 34). (Refer to the “Offset value” column).

  Here, the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning (see FIG. 36 (a)) and the pre-correction offset value at the start of variation (see FIG. 42 (a)) are common offset values. , “Process for correcting to offset value for selecting variation pattern according to number of suspended balls” is performed. Specifically, the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are vacant numbers, are added to the offset value “00H” or “04H” before correction at the time of starting the fluctuation, so that the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are empty numbers. The number is corrected to an offset value corresponding to the number.

  Specifically, in the correction process in step S441, the special symbol operation confirmation data is confirmed. If the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is the special symbol 1, the current special value is set to the offset value “00H” before the fluctuation start correction. 1 is added, and when the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is special symbol 2, the current special figure 2 active ball is added to the offset value “04H” before fluctuation start correction. (Step S441). However, the “current number of pending balls for operation” to be added is the number of pending balls for operation that presupposes that the reserved balls for the current variable display operation will be digested. This is the number of active suspension balls obtained by the subtraction process in step S402 in FIG.

  The fluctuation pattern selection offset value (offset value after fluctuation start correction) obtained by this correction process and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, this offset value is used to select the desired “variation pattern distribution table first layer” from the variation pattern distribution table selection table (steps S441 to S443).

  When the correction process in step S441 is completed, a variation pattern distribution table selection table is acquired (step S442), and the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation corrected in step S441 are referred to the variation pattern distribution table selection table. The variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy corresponding to the pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is acquired (step S443).

(T-10. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table: FIG. 43)
FIG. 43 shows a variation pattern distribution table selection table. The variation pattern distribution table selection table is a table for selecting a variation start variation pattern determination table (variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 44, FIG. 45: first layer). Treated as included in the concept of the judgment table. In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation pattern distribution table first layers associated with variation pattern selection offsets and variation pattern distribution designation numbers (Tcode) are defined. . Specifically, based on the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), any one of the plurality of types of variation pattern distribution table first layer (H1 to H12, A1 to A6) is selected. One variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy is determined.

  The variation pattern distribution table selection table has the same basic configuration as the winning command distribution table selection table of FIG. That is, the winning command distribution table selection table stores the address value of the first level of the variation pattern distribution table according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). In order to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program, the data structure uses continuous addresses so as to correspond to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern. In short, in the variation pattern distribution table selection table, the second start address is an address that specifies the variation pattern determination table at the start of variation corresponding to a specific winning type (loss A), that is, the offset value “00H”. Are stored in the ROM 202 in such a manner that the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is arranged in order from the second head address in a form related to the number of pending operations. The selection of the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is performed by first selecting a variation pattern distribution table selection table corresponding to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) and then varying the pattern distribution according to the variation pattern selection offset value. Select the first table hierarchy. That is, in the variation pattern distribution table selection table selected for each variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the top address value that defines the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is described. Then, the variation pattern selection offset value acquired in step S441 is added to obtain a relative address with respect to the head address, and the address value of the target variation pattern distribution table first layer is specified, so that the variation pattern distribution The first level of the table can be selected.

  Here, when the variation of the notice effect during the symbol variation display game is to be abundant, it is possible to select the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the gaming state and the number of suspended balls, of course, to further increase the gameability. In order to increase the number, it is possible to select a special symbol variation pattern that takes into account the number of reserved balls in one game state, and the special symbol variation pattern in another game state without considering the number of active reserve balls. It is desired to have a variety of gameplay that allows selection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern distribution table selection table is defined as follows. Of the variation pattern allocation table selection tables, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “00H” or “01H”, that is, the variation pattern allocation table selection table of “normal A” or “normal B” has the same winning type. Even so, the first variation layer of the variation pattern distribution table that is different depending on the number of suspended balls is selected (see the column of offset values 00H to 04H), while the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) “ In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of “02H”, that is, “normal C”, the same first variation pattern distribution table first layer is selected regardless of the number of active balls. In other words, in the variation pattern distribution table selection table of “normal A” or “normal B”, different table data (variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H1 to H4) is stored in the memory area corresponding to the operation holding ball. In the “normal C” variation pattern distribution table selection table, the same table data (variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9) is stored in the memory area corresponding to the operation-pending ball.

  Here, the number of table data stored in the variation pattern distribution table selection table corresponding to each gaming state (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) (the number of the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table) If they are different, a variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to each gaming state must be provided, which complicates the processing and increases the control burden. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of table data stored in the variation pattern distribution table selection table for each gaming state is the same, and there is no need to separately define a variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to each gaming state. , Reduce the control burden.

(B) Fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)
After obtaining the variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy in the process of step S443, the CPU 201 obtains the variation pattern random value 1 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S444), and the variation pattern. By referring to the distribution table first layer, “variation start command data 1” and “variation pattern distribution table second layer” corresponding to random number 1 for variation pattern are acquired (step S445).

(T-11. Fluctuation pattern distribution table first layer: FIGS. 44 and 45)
With reference to FIGS. 44 to 45, the first hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table will be described. FIG. 44 shows the first hierarchy of the hit variation pattern distribution table selected at the time of hitting, and FIG. 45 shows the first hierarchy of the shift variation pattern allocation table selected at the time of loss.

  As shown in the figure, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy includes a plurality of types of hit fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy “A1 to A6”, and the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy includes A plurality of types of loss variation pattern distribution table first layers H1 to H12 are included. The first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is mainly used for determining the variation pattern type.

  Each variation pattern distribution table first layer is associated with a variation pattern random value 1, a variation start command data 1 and a determination region (determination value) for determining the second variation pattern distribution table layer. More specifically, the variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy are determined depending on which determination value the variation pattern random value 1 belongs to. ing. In the figure, as in the case of the winning command distribution table already described, the determination value is omitted and only the selection rate is shown.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the relationship between the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table and the winning command distribution table (the relationship between the prefetch variation pattern and the basic pattern) will be described.

  Comparison of the above-mentioned winning variation pattern distribution table first layer (FIG. 44) used in the fluctuation start process and the winning command distribution table (FIG. 37) used in the winning process (prefetch determination). In this case, the “hit variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy A1 to A6” and the “winning winning command distribution tables a1 to a6” use the same random number value 1 for the variation pattern and use the same variation pattern contents (basic pattern). And the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern) are determined, and the determination values for determining the variation pattern are configured to match in each table. Specifically, for example, referring to the hit variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy A2 in FIG. 44, the content of the random number for variation pattern 1 is in the range of determination values 0 to 49 (distribution). “Weak SP reach A” is selected when it belongs to the value “50” description column), and “strong SP reach” is selected when it belongs to the range of the judgment values 50 to 129 (description column of the distribution value “80”). If “A” is selected and belongs to the range of determination values 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39”), “weak SP reach B” is selected and the range of determination values 169 to 238 (distribution) In the case of belonging to the value “80” column), “strong SP reach B” is selected. On the other hand, referring to the winning prize command distribution table a2 in FIG. 37, the content of the random number value 1 for the variation pattern is in the range of the determination values 0 to 49 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “50”). “Weak SP reach A” is selected if it belongs, and “strong SP reach A” is selected if it belongs to the range of determination values 50 to 129 (corresponding to the column for the distribution value “80”). If it belongs to the range of 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “39”), “weak SP reach B” is selected, and the range of the determination values 169 to 238 (the description of the distribution value “80” is described). (Corresponding to the column) indicates that “strong SP reach B” is selected (similar to the other). That is, there is a discrepancy between the look-ahead variation pattern for one activated ball and the variation pattern of the special symbol when the activated ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation (variation pattern at the beginning of variation). (See the “prefetching variation pattern designation content” column in FIGS. 36 and 37 and the “first layer determination content” column in FIGS. 43 and 44).

  The reason for this is as follows. In relation to the production control, at the time of winning (at the time of prefetch determination), the main control unit 20 sends a “hold addition command” including prefetch fluctuation pattern information to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 receiving this sends the hold. Based on the addition command, effect control relating to the pre-reading notice effect is performed. On the other hand, at the start of change, the main control unit 20 sends the change pattern designation command including change pattern information at the start of change to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving the effect control unit 24, the effect control related to the notice effect in the symbol variation display game is performed based on the variation pattern designation command. For this reason, if the information about the prefetch variation pattern received by the production control unit 24 and the information about the basic pattern of the variation pattern at the start of the variation do not match, the contents of the prefetch announcement effect and the symbol variation display game The content of the notice effect will be inconsistent, and not only will the significance of providing the pre-read notice effect be lost, but it will also cause distrust to the gaming machine and reduce the player's willingness to play. It is. As such a case, for example, the hold display relating to the pre-reading notice effect changes to a lustrous “rainbow” and the “predictive pre-reading notice effect” that informs the jackpot winning is confirmed. There is a case where the result of the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball becomes “losing”. If such cases occur frequently, distrust of the gaming machine may be caused, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related, and when the production control unit 24 determines these productions, the contents of both are not contradicted as much as possible. I have to.

  However, as an exceptional production mode, a production mode in which “the content of the pre-reading notice effect ≠ the content of the basic pattern”, that is, a production mode in which a contradiction may occur that “the content of the pre-reading fluctuation pattern ≠ the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation” (Contradiction effect) may be included. For example, even if the hold display related to the pre-reading notice effect is a “red” display that increases the expectation of winning a big hit, during the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball, there is no hot notice effect. If the “red” display is, for example, “SP reach confirmation” hold display, the target action ball is the target. An example of such an effect is that the N reach is made to appear during the symbol variation display game. In order to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the contradiction, such a performance mode is selected with a very low probability in the case of a loss, and most of them are selected only in the case of a big win. It is preferable to select only when winning a big hit. In this way, when the contradictory effect occurs, the contradictory effect can be made to function as a kind of premium effect such that the degree of expectation for winning the big hit is extremely increased or the big win winning decision is notified. The “contradiction effect” as described above is effective in enhancing the fun of the game in that the result is contrary to the expectation after deceiving the player temporarily.

  In the case of a loss, as in the case of the hit described above, the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related, and when the production control unit 24 determines these productions, The content is not contradicted.

  Specifically, the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer (FIG. 45) used in the variation start processing and the loss winning command distribution table (FIG. 38) used in the winning processing (prefetch determination) are shown. In comparison, the contents of the basic pattern determined in accordance with the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H1, H5 to H12 and the determination value for determining the basic pattern are the lost prize command In the distribution tables h1 to h9, the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern determined according to the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern and the determination value for determining the prefetch fluctuation pattern are used. As in the case of winning as described above, the contents of both of the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related to each other when the production control unit 24 determines these productions. (See the “prefetched variation pattern designation contents” column in FIGS. 36 and 38 and the “first layer determination contents” column in FIGS. 43 and 45). Note that the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H2 to H4 does not correspond to any of the loss winning command distribution tables, but in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss A”, the operation holding ball The content of the basic pattern that can be selected here is the same as that of the first step H1 of the loss variation pattern distribution table, and only the selection rate is different. Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H2 to H4, because of the presence of “indefinite (normal fluctuation pattern or reach fluctuation pattern designation)” in the loss winning command distribution table h1, the pre-read fluctuation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of fluctuation Are related so that no problems arise.

  Note that the first level of the loss variation pattern distribution table of the present embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. Focusing on the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5 and H7, both of these are selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss B”, and the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5 is The “normal A” and loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5 is selected in the case of “normal B” (see FIG. 43). Here, referring to FIG. 45, both of the basic patterns are selected from among a plurality of common basic patterns (weak SP reach A or strong SP reach A). Each selectivity is different. Specifically, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5, the weak SP reach A has a relatively higher selection rate than the strong SP reach A, and the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H5. On the contrary, in H7, the strong SP reach A has a higher selectivity than the strong SP reach A.

  When attention is paid to the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H6, H8, these are all selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss C”, and the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy. H6 is selected when “normal A” and the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H8 is “normal B” (see FIG. 43). Here, referring to FIG. 45, both of the basic patterns are selected from among a plurality of common basic patterns (weak SP reach B or strong SP reach B). Each selectivity is different. Specifically, in the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer H6, the weak SP reach B has a relatively higher selection rate than the strong SP reach B, and the loss variation pattern distribution table first layer H6. On the contrary, in H8, the strong SP reach B has a higher selectivity than the weak SP reach B.

  This is the appearance of a reach production with a relatively high chance of winning a big hit when winning wins B and C during “normal B” compared to winning wins B and C during “normal A” This means that the rate increases, and in this embodiment, the player who is in “normal B” can feel the winning expectation for the big hit rather than in “normal A”. In other words, the chance of giving the player a sense of winning the big hit for the player in “normal B” can be relatively increased. As a result, when the player is in the “normal B” state, the player can be given more sense of winning big wins, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  However, when viewed from the player side, the internal gaming state may be clearly recognized as being “normal B” in the normal gaming state. In this case, it is considered that even if the appearance rate of the reach effect that the expectation of winning the big hit is relatively increased, the player's feeling of uplifting is not so much increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem is solved by enabling the transition to “normal B” while keeping the internal gaming state secret. For example, if the gaming state is (I) small win B, C winning → “normal C (normal gaming state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A (normal gaming state)” → small winning A winning → When transitioning to “normal B (normal game state)”, (II) 2R short-open latent probability change big win win → “normal C (latent state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A ( The case of transition from “latent probability state)” → small win A winning → “normal B (latent state)” will be described as a representative example.

  The route won in the 2R short open latency change big hit in (II) above, even if it shifts to “Normal B (normal gaming state)” via the route won in the small hits B and C in (I) above The player can grasp that the current gaming state is “Normal B” even when the game state is shifted to “Normal B (latency probability state)”, but in the present embodiment, Since the internal game state is concealed due to the relationship between the game behavior and the 2R latent probability change big hit game behavior and the presence of control to shift to “normal C”, the current internal game state must be accurately grasped. I can't. As a result, “normal B” in which the internal gaming state is unknown as shown in the above (I) and (II), compared to the case where the internal gaming state is clearly understood as being in “normal B” of the normal gaming state. When a reach production with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit appears in the middle, the sense of expectation that “there may be a latent state at present, and this may be a big hit with this reach” increases. When the internal gaming state is concealed, providing a gaming state that increases the chances of giving a winning expectation to the big win by increasing the appearance rate of reach production with a high expectation degree of winning a big hit increases the fun of the game Above, it has significant significance.

(C) Fluctuation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447)
Next, the variation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447) will be described. After obtaining the fluctuation start command data 1 and the fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy in the process of step S445, the CPU 201 obtains the fluctuation pattern random value 2 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S445). S446) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, the “variation start command data 2” and the “variation time table” corresponding to the variation pattern random value 2 are acquired (step S447).

(T-12. Fluctuation pattern distribution table second layer: FIGS. 46 and 47)
With reference to FIGS. 46 to 47, the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table will be described. 46 shows the second hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table selected by the first hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table, and FIG. 47 shows the second change pattern allocation table of the shift fluctuation pattern distribution table selected by the first hierarchy of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table. Two layers are shown.

  As shown in the figure, the second variation pattern allocation table second hierarchy of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of hit variation pattern distribution tables second layers AA1 to AA9. Includes a plurality of types of loss variation pattern distribution tables second hierarchy HH1 to HH12. These second variation pattern distribution table layers are mainly used to identify individual variation patterns included in the variation pattern types determined in the first variation pattern distribution table layer.

  Each variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy includes a variation pattern random number value 2, a variation start command data 2, and a determination region (determination value) for determining a variation time table in association with each other. Specifically, the change start command data 2 and the change time table are determined depending on which determination value the change pattern random value 2 belongs to. In the figure, as in the case of the winning command distribution table (FIGS. 37 and 38) already described, the determination value is omitted and only the selection rate is shown.

  When the “change start command data 2” is determined, the change pattern at the start of change, which is the specific content of the basic pattern, is determined. For example, when the content of the variation start command data 1 determined in the first layer of the variation pattern distribution table is the variation pattern type “weak SP reach A”, it is determined in the second layer of the variation pattern distribution table. The specific content of the “weak SP reach A”, that is, one of “weak SP reach A1 to weak SP reach A3” in the “weak SP reach A” type is determined.

  The “variation time table” includes “TIMTBL-A1 to TIMTBL-A21” determined in the second hierarchy of the hit variation pattern distribution table and the variation time table “determined in the second variation pattern distribution table”. A plurality of types of variation time tables of “TIMTBL-H1 to TIMTBL-H24” are included. When this variation time table is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined, and this variation time becomes the execution time of the current symbol variation display game (design game).

(Variation pattern related to special symbol 2)
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following characteristic elements are provided for the special variation pattern (variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side) related to the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 operation holding ball). 43, the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 44, the first variation pattern allocation table of FIG. 44, the first variation layer of the variation variation pattern distribution table of FIG. 45, the first variation pattern distribution table of FIG. This will be described with reference to two layers.

  First, referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 43, “Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Loss A” to “Special Figure 2 Hold 3 Loss A” (offset values “04H” to “07H after correction at the start of change”). )), “Special Figure 2 Loss B” (same offset value “0AH”), and “Special Figure 2 Loss C” (same offset value “0BH”), “Normal A” and “Normal B” ( In the case of the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) “01H” “02H”), only the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4 is selected. In the case of “normal C”, the loss variation pattern distribution is selected. Only the table first hierarchy H9 is selected.

  Regarding the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4 and H9, referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy in FIG. 45, the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4 has only the “normal variation 3” type. , And the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9 designates only the “special normal variation” type (normal variation pattern type for normal C). In other words, the “normal A” to “normal C” state is “no electric support”, and the “normal fluctuation pattern” for a non-reach effect that does not go through the reach state in the case of a loss winning in this electric no support state. "Only type" is specified. 47, with reference to FIG. 47, referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy HH3, HH9 determined by the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H4, H9, the fluctuation start The fluctuation pattern of time is “normal fluctuation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds)” in the case of “normal A” and “normal B”, and “special normal fluctuation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds) in the case of“ normal C ”. " In the present embodiment, the “normal variation 3” type has a single “normal variation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds), and the“ special normal variation ”type has a single“ special normal variation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds). The present invention is not limited to this. Each variation type may include a plurality of types of normal variation patterns.

  In the present embodiment, as in “normal A” to “normal C”, in the case of a game state with a “no power support state”, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established, and the special figure 2 operation is suspended. Prefetch determination for a sphere is prohibited.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal variation pattern is selected for all the variation patterns on the special symbol 2 side in the absence of the electric support, and the prefetch determination for the special symbol 2 operation holding ball is prohibited. The reason for this is as follows.

  For example, only three special figure 1 operation holding balls with normal fluctuation patterns are held, and in this state, there is a winning at the upper start port 34, and a pre-reading advance notice for the fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball is made. The case where the production is started will be described as a representative example. (In this embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading notice production is performed or not is determined on the condition that the reach variation pattern does not exist in the old operation holding ball, or the old operation holding ball. If the reach variation pattern exists, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed is selected by lottery, but the probability that the pre-reading notice effect is executable is determined to be zero). Here, the above-mentioned “fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball” which has been a target of the pre-reading notice effect will be referred to as “notice target holding ball”.

  In the state where the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball has not yet been digested, when the lower start opening 35 has won a prize and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated, the special fluctuation function generated later will give priority to the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Digested. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 2 actuated holding ball is determined to be a “latch with change fluctuation pattern”, the loss that has no relation to the pre-reading notice effect for the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball will be lost. No. “Reach production” is intervening, and the pre-reading notice production is cut off in the middle. As a result, there is a fear that the function of the pre-reading notice effect is not sufficiently exhibited and the effect of the effect cannot be fully utilized.

  In view of the above problems, first, when the winning result in the “no power support” state is “lost”, only the “normal variation pattern” is designated as the variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side. Thereby, the said problem can be solved. However, with this alone, a series of 'pre-reading determination' processing related to the winning time processing is executed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball that occurred later, and the control load of the pre-reading notice effect still increases. End up.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established in the state without the electric support, and the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition” is in the state with the electric support. "Condition" is established, and the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special symbol 1 side and special symbol 2 side is prohibited is switched according to the gaming state. Thereby, the control burden regarding the prefetch notice effect can be reduced. If the special figure 2 action holding ball that was generated later was a big hit (including a small hit), the “variable pattern with reach” was selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side, and the above notice subject The “reach effect” will be intervened during the pre-reading notice effect for the holding ball, but in this case, it will be a big hit as it is, and it will not cause any disadvantage to the player, and the pre-reading notice effect will be cut off. In such a case, it is possible to add an unexpected performance such as winning a big hit, so there is no particular problem. In addition, if “variation pattern with reach” is selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side during the pre-reading notice effect on the special symbol 1 side, a dedicated reach effect related to the pre-reading notice effect is generated. You may comprise so that it may be made.

  In the “probable change state”, there is a possibility that the reach fluctuation pattern is selected for both the special symbol 1 and 2 fluctuation patterns (for the special symbol 2 side, “special figure 2 loss B (change start) In the case of “offset value after time correction“ 0AH ”)” and “special figure 2 loss C (same offset value“ 0BH ”)”, the shift variation pattern distribution table for designating “reaching during probability variation” of the loss variation pattern with reach When the first hierarchy H11 is selected (see FIGS. 43 and 44), a special figure 1 operation holding ball is generated later while a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated. Thus, even if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball is a “reach fluctuation pattern”, the existing special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested sequentially by the action of the priority fluctuation function. Notice production No shredded is that, no particular problem. In other words, if the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is being generated, there should be at least one special figure 2 operation holding ball. It is because it is not digested.

(About loss variation patterns that can be selected during "Normal C")
Further, the loss variation pattern selected during “normal C” in the present embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. Referring to the column “Normal C” (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “02H”) in the variation pattern allocation table selection table in FIG. The loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9, H10 is selected. However, the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H10 is selected according to the loss type. This is selected in the case of FIG. 1 lose C ”(same offset value“ 09H ”). In addition, as described above, the loss variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy H9 designates only the “special normal variation” type (normal variation pattern type for normal C). In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be activated can be changed in a relatively short period of time. If there is a change in the number according to the number of active balls to be used, it is possible to select an effect time (design) for each symbol variation display game. The execution time of the variable display game can be changed, and various effects can be generated (as such a gaming state, “normal A” and “normal C” are used in this embodiment. (See FIG. 43 in particular)). However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is changed according to the number of suspended balls, the effect time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently in a short period of time, and it spans multiple symbol variation display games. Thus, it may be difficult to continuously develop productions that are closely related (for example, story-style productions tailored to a story). For example, in the case of a narrative-like production composed of story productions from episodes 1 to 4, if the production times from episodes 1 to 4 are the same, this will be developed continuously. Although it is easy (selection of production is easy), if the production time changes according to the operation holding ball, the number of operation holding balls is 0 to 3 for each of the first to fourth episodes. There is a need to provide many corresponding effects, and it is necessary to make the contents of the effects between the effects having different effect times into expressions with relevance, which increases the effect control burden.

  In addition, when making the above narrative effect appear, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, a continuous notice effect such as a pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets an existing active ball. Therefore, the number of times is limited up to the maximum number of reserved storage (in this embodiment, 4 times). In other words, the problem is that, firstly, there is a possibility that the production time will change for each symbol variation display game, and the second design variation display game cannot be predicted. Second, For example, it is not possible to produce the production with the close relations over the maximum number of games of 4 times.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a specific gaming state (usually C) in which the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of the operation-pending balls is provided, and the specific gaming state By setting the number of times of continuation (number of symbol variation display games (number of variations of special symbols)) to a number exceeding at least the maximum number of reserved memories, it is possible to easily develop such a narrative style effect for a long period of time. I am doing so. In particular, the concealment effect mode corresponding to “normal C” of the present embodiment works as an effect mode that can conceal the jackpot lottery probability, and therefore, under such a concealment effect mode, a relatively long number of games are straddled. It is extremely effective to develop a narrative-like performance that enlivens the expectation of a high-probability state in order to improve the fun of the game. In the case of ST machines, in order to leave the player with a high probability of expectation, if “normal C” is repeated S times and the specified ST number is T times, “maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) It is preferable to satisfy the relationship <S ≦ T ”. More preferably, “the maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) <S <T”. In the case of the above “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S <T”, “normal C” ends and “normal A” is shifted to before “normal ST” ends, but from “normal C” Even after shifting to “normal A”, the expectation of the high probability state remains until the above-mentioned prescribed number of STs is completed. The reason is that the player cannot accurately know the internal gaming state. Therefore, even if the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” in the low probability state is made, the player will enjoy the game with an expectation of the high probability state until the specified number of STs is completed. It becomes like this. As a result, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine, rather than having a relationship of “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S = T”.

  In this embodiment, in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss B” or “Special Figure 1 Loss C” in normal C, the “special reach” type (reach fluctuation pattern type for normal C) of the reach fluctuation pattern is selected. (See the column of “variation pattern distribution table first layer H10” in FIGS. 43 and 45). However, in the case of a loss in “normal C”, the reach fluctuation pattern may not be selected at all, and only the “special normal fluctuation 10 s” that is the normal fluctuation pattern may be selected. In this way, when a loss is won, only the “special normal fluctuation 10s” having the same fluctuation pattern is selected each time, regardless of the number of suspended balls and the type of loss. As a result, as long as the game continues to win, the game progresses while the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the production time has the same time width, so in developing the narrative-like production, Placed under active gaming conditions. Also, in the case of a big win, a specific performance (for example, special reach 1 to 3) specified by the hit fluctuation pattern can be generated. When a special effect such as an epilogue effect (in this case, an aspect of a reach effect based on special reach 1 to 3) occurs, a big win winning decision (may include a small win) can be notified. Become. In addition, the above “story-style production” is, for example, a “combat production (fighting production where the enemy falls when winning a big hit. Defeat production that receives an attack from the enemy when winning a win)” ”Or“ Storyline production (when the big hit is won, the final story production of the last story of the story, and when the loser is won, the story continues) ” Gives a predetermined command to the player every time the game is executed. “Direction effect (for example, with a button notice effect,“ Press the frame effect button 13 to defeat the enemy! ”) Achievement effect. When win is lost, there is no particular limitation as long as some story development is made, such as an instruction unachieved effect in which the enemy remains).

(D) Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448)
Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, the special symbol variation time setting process (S448) will be described next. After obtaining the variation time table in the process of step S447, the CPU 201 refers to the obtained variation time table and stores the variation time of the special symbol in the “special symbol accessory operation timer” (step S448). The “special symbol accessory operation timer” is one of timer management areas in the RAM 203 that manages timers related to game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a timer management area, there are a special symbol determination timer, which will be described later, in addition to the special symbol accessory operation timer.

(E) Fluctuation pattern designation command creation processing (step S449)
Next, based on the “variation start command data 1” acquired in the process of step S445 and the “variation start command data 2” acquired in the process of step S447, a “variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern at the start of the variation” "Is created (step S449).

  Then, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S413: variation pattern designation command transmission process). As a result, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is exited and the process proceeds to step S414 in FIG.

(C-2: List of change pattern designation commands: FIGS. 48 and 49)
48 and 49 show a list of variation pattern designation commands created by the variation pattern designation command creation processing in step S449. FIG. 48 shows a list of hit variation pattern designation commands, and FIG. 49 is a list showing a list of loss variation pattern designation commands.

  The “variation pattern designation command” is one of the production control commands, and is composed of 2 bytes. The variation pattern designation command of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of commands, “variation patterns A1 to A21” as hit variation pattern designation commands and “variation patterns H1 to H24” as loss variation pattern designation commands. When this variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, a decorative symbol designation command is transmitted (step S416 in FIG. 15). Upon receiving these commands, the effect control unit 24 determines the effects that appear in the current symbol variation display game (including the decorative symbol mode to be finally stopped) based on the information included in each command. An effect control process based on the effect is performed. Thus, an effect during the symbol variation display game is realized.

  Next, with reference to the list of loss variation pattern designation commands in FIG. 49, the gaming state viewed from the viewpoint of the variation time defined in various variation patterns will be described.

  The normal variation pattern of the present embodiment includes “normal variation 12s (variation time 12 seconds)” (variation pattern H1) and “normal variation 8s (variation time 8) that can be selected during“ normal A ”or“ normal B ”. Second) "(variation pattern H2), and" normal variation 3s (variation time 3 seconds) "(variation pattern H3)," special normal variation (variation time 10 seconds) "(variation pattern) that can be selected during 'normal C' H17), and “normal fluctuation 2s during fluctuation (2 seconds of fluctuation)” (fluctuation pattern H21) that can be selected during the “probability change state”.

(D-1: High-speed fluctuation state)
Of these normal variation patterns, attention is paid to “normal variation 2s during probability variation”. This “normal variation 2s during probability change” is a variation pattern in which a relatively short variation time is defined, and in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the shortest variation time is defined among all variation patterns. . Here, in the loss variation pattern in the “probability variation state”, the “normal variation 2s during probability variation” that is a single variation pattern is set, and the “winning loss A” has the highest winning probability among the loss types. This is the normal variation pattern selected. Therefore, in the case of the loss winning in the “probable change state”, a high-speed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is “2 seconds” is selected with high probability. That is, during the probability variation state, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (the average time of the symbol variation display game per game, or the time of the symbol variation display game per unit time) is larger than that of other probability variation states. It is placed under a “high-speed fluctuation state” that becomes relatively short.

  Such “high-speed fluctuating state” is mainly useful in a gaming state in which importance is placed on the game characteristics such as “increase the average digestion speed of the game and increase the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game”. In particular, during the probabilistic state, the game state has been devised to improve the game digestion speed per unit time and make it easier to win big hits. Become. When placed under such a gaming state, there are many players who want to get a big hit faster than enjoying the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated when the probability variation state is in effect. If the “short time state” is configured to be generated, the lottery lottery probability is in a low probability state, but the lottery number improvement state becomes “electric support support state + special symbol short time state”. Also in this case, the “high-speed fluctuation state” may be generated in the same manner as the “probability change state” described above.

(D-2: Low speed fluctuation state)
For the above "high-speed fluctuation state", multiple types of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times such as "normal fluctuation 12s (variation time 12 seconds)" and "normal fluctuation 8s (variation time 8 seconds)" are selected In a game state that is likely to be played, the game is placed under a “low-speed fluctuation state” in which the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is relatively long. Under such a “low speed fluctuation state”, the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the “high speed fluctuation state”, but instead, the production time can be made longer. It is useful in a gaming state where emphasis is placed on gameplay such as “enjoy”. In the gaming state where the probability of winning a big hit is low or the possibility is high, there are many players who want to enjoy the production while enjoying the production, contrary to the above-mentioned probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of “normal A” or “normal B”, the “low-speed fluctuation state” is generated.

(D-3: Quasi-constant velocity fluctuation state)
Further, in this embodiment, as in the case of “normal C”, regardless of the number of suspended balls, “special normal fluctuation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds)” is selected with a high probability at the time of loss, and each time A “quasi-constant speed variation state” is generated in which the digest time of the symbol variation display game is substantially constant. Under such a “quasi-constant speed variation state”, as described above, the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the performance time is almost constant, and the game proceeds multiple times (especially This is a special gaming state in which an effect having a close relationship (story-like effect of tailoring a story) can be generated across the symbol variation display game having a number greater than the maximum number of reserved memories. Even in the “probability change state”, the “normal change 2s during probability change” is selected with a high probability at the time of losing regardless of the number of suspended balls. I can say that. In the “normal C” and “probability change state” of the present embodiment, a “reach fluctuation pattern” having a longer fluctuation time (production time) than the “normal fluctuation pattern” can be selected at the time of loss, but at the time of loss, the reach fluctuation pattern is selected. May be selected, or the reach variation pattern selection rate may be extremely low. Also in this case, it becomes a “quasi-constant speed fluctuation state”, which is effective in generating the narrative effect.

(8-4. Special symbol variation processing: Fig. 20)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory action timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). By this change stop command, the production control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the special symbol change time has elapsed, and stops and displays (determined display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 21A and 21B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  21A and 21B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S474: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (usually A is specified) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and the game state notification LED (not shown) is turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, when the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 as the digest of the current fluctuation number (step S479), and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol short-time state end count has not reached 70, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time short-term end is performed on the assumption that the special symbol short-time state end count has reached 70 (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). By receiving the short end command at this time, the effect control unit 24 grasps that there is no electric support from the next game. In the present embodiment, when the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is the same as the transition from the probability change state to the normal A, the presentation control unit 24 receives this “short time end command”. For example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, the background image (background effect) for “normal A effect mode” is switched to perform effect control processing under the effect mode, or as the launch position It is possible to perform an effect control process for causing a “launching position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” that instructs to aim at the leftward flow path 3b.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times (70 times) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the variation number of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number of times (step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In the case of the latent state, the special symbol time counter is set to zero (see the game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 15 and FIG. 18 showing the details thereof). In the process, the end timing of the latent state is managed.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to the process in step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the specified number of game state transitions (when transitioning to “normal B”: gaming state) It is determined whether or not the prescribed number of times of transition 100 times and “normal C” transition time: 15 times or 30 times) is zero (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the transition setting process to “normal A” is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation count has reached the prescribed game state transition count (step S490). . Here, “00H (ordinary A designation)” is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) as the transition setting process to “normal A”. As a result, the selection condition for the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. This step S490 process functions as a selection condition switching means for switching and controlling the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined selection change condition. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in “normal A” is selected.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including “normal A” transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “game state designation command”, the production control unit 24 grasps that “normal B” or “normal C” ends in the current game and “normal A” starts from the next game. Thereby, when starting the decoration pattern variation display game to be performed next, the effect control unit 24 switches to the background image (background effect) for the “normal A effect mode” and performs the effect control process under the effect mode. Do.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step 60 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 22)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), a small hit process is performed to control a series of operations of the special variable winning device 52 related to the small hit game (step S504). , Exit this special electric equipment management process.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH),
Processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  The big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described below.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 22) will be described.

(9-1. Big hit start processing :)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In the big hit starting process of step S505, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous actuating device operation flag as a setting process at the start of the big hit game necessary for starting the big hit game, and the special electric accessory operation status is stored. Is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since “01H” is set in the continuous number counter here, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a “big hit start setting table (not shown)” in which the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) and round display LED numbers according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) is determined is acquired. Referring to this jackpot start setting table, each data corresponding to the special symbol determination data of this time is stored in the storage area of the corresponding RAM 203, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer To do. The “start interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot is fixed (see step S 471 in FIG. 20 and step S 471 in FIG. 21A), the special variable winning device 52 is activated. , Which is a time interval that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed (first effect time before the first round game is performed). The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round number display means), and indicates the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of the current big hit game.

    Next, a “hit hit command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the “big hit start command” includes information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the effect control unit 24 side It is also used when determining a series of winning effects (opening effects, round effects, round end effects, ending effects, etc. corresponding to each jackpot type) developed during the game.

  As described above, when the big hit starting process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the jackpot start process (step S505) is monitored. When passing (step S506), “interval time before opening (interval time set in special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) described later)” is monitored. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory action timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round (1R), the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current round The opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 according to the number is set (large winning opening / closing operation setting process). Specifically, a special prize opening / closing operation time (for example, 29.8 seconds) for opening the special prize opening 50 is stored in a special symbol accessory operation timer, and a solenoid for controlling the special prize opening solenoid 52c. Set control data. As a result, the special prize opening solenoid 52c is operated, and the special prize opening 50 is opened with the upper prize opening / closing operation time as an upper limit. When the special prize opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Active (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-3. Special electric equipment during operation)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number (large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process), and the maximum winning number is reached. If you do, clear the special symbol accessory operation timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and the open large winning opening 50 is closed when the maximum winning number is reached. It has become. Until the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (until the opening time of the big prize opening expires or the maximum number of winnings is reached), this special electric accessory operating process is performed without doing anything. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (when the maximum number of winnings has been reached or the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed), the special electric accessory action status is determined as the end of the current round game. Switch to “Continue judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operating process The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(9-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time after closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see the special electric accessory operating process (step S507)), this remaining ball discharge time is set. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapses), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added to the continuation counter (+1) as the process for continuing the round game, and the “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The object operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). As a result, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory action timer, and then the special electric accessory action status is “finished” as various setting processes at the end of the round game. “Processing (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and defines the section where the ending effect is performed. Refers to the time span.

  Then, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and this big hit start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S 061 in FIG. Note that the “big hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of big hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and the effect control unit 24 side also determines the effect mode after the big hit game. Used. Therefore, this jackpot end command plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state in addition to a role for instructing the start of the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to achieve consistency between the gaming state transferred after the big hit game and the effect mode related to the gaming state.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end process (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero, nothing is done and the jackpot end process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time elapses), the value of each transition state buffer is stored in each state flag, and the gaming state after the big hit game is designated. Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 15, see FIG. 18 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation counter. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the jackpot are performed. Here, as various data used during the big hit game control processing, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds, the round display LED number, various buffers, etc. are cleared respectively. The special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. As described above, when the big hit end process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed. In this process, it is confirmed whether the special symbol time reduction state flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) or OFF state (≠ 5 AH), and in the case of the ON state, the data for lighting the game state notification LED, specifically, the game 01H is stored in the status notification LED output number.

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, the “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Accordingly, here, the process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening 50 is performed so that the operation mode during the small hit game is substantially the same as the operation mode of the “2R short open latency large hit game”. Is called.

  When the small hit processing is entered, first, the “start interval time” in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and a “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. . After the start interval has elapsed, a small hit game state transition preparation process for designating a game state after the small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and then the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 is “2R latent probability big hit game”. The control data for the solenoid for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set so as to be the same or very similar to the operation mode. Thereby, the big winning opening 50 is opened like a 2R latent big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. Note that the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as that due to the big winning, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the big winning opening 50 is closed. However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, when the maximum winning number is reached, the pseudo round game itself is ended.

  When a series of opening / closing operations of the big prize opening 50 is completed, a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of the small hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the post-small hit effect mode. It is also used when Therefore, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect, this small hit end command also plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state, and an effect that functions in the same way as the “big winning end command” related to the big hit game Control command.

<9-6-1. Game state transition preparation process for small hits>
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, first, a game state transition table selection table for small hits (FIG. 51) is acquired, and with reference to the game state transition table selection table for small hits, a game state determination number (YJ) and a small hit type ( The game state transition table for small hits (FIG. 52) according to the special symbol determination data) is acquired. Then, with reference to the acquired game state transition table for small hits, the corresponding data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number storage area and special symbol fluctuation number counter). Thereby, the gaming state after the small hit game is determined.

(T-13. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 51)
FIG. 51 shows a game state transition table selection table for small hits. The small hit gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables ("JTTBL-S1" to "JTTBL-" associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. S3 ": Refer to FIG. 61 to be described later). Specifically, based on the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, any one of a plurality of types of small hit game state transition tables The game state transition table for small hits is determined.

(T-13. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 52)
FIG. 52 shows the above-described game state transition table for small hits. The game state transition table for small hits of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-S1” to “JTTBL-S3”. In these small hit gaming state transition tables, data to be stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter are defined as data for designating the gaming state to be shifted after the small hit game. It has been. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. As data for designating the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game, data for storage in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter are determined. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation count counter, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game is determined. Here, in “JTTBL-S1” to “JTTBL-S3”, only the data to be stored in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number buffer and the special symbol fluctuation number counter buffer is determined, so that the winning of the small hit is won. However, there is no transition of the internal gaming state, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed. The above-mentioned “JTTBL-S1” is “normal B”, “JTTBL-S2” is “normal C (gaming state transition prescribed number of times 15)”, and “JTTBL-S3” is “normal C (gaming state transition prescribed number of times). It is a game state transition table for shifting to (30 times) '.

  After exiting the above small hit process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 23 to 29>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 29, an effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 23) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 25).

<10. Production control side main processing: FIG. 23>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 23 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 25) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like.

  For example, when a variation pattern designation command and a decorative symbol designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer, in the command analysis process, based on information (variation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands, One or more types of effect patterns are determined. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  In the scenario update process, the basic effect scenario determined in the received command analysis process (step S073) may be rewritten as necessary. As described above, when the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the basic effect scenario, it is necessary to change to an operation effect scenario different from the current non-operation notice effect scenario. Here, when it is confirmed that the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the operation effect scenario is changed (for example, the parts effect is rearranged), and the changed effect scenario data is set as the scenario setting. Reset to area.

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 25) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, motor control data for the movable object accessory is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 25) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is ended, and the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(11. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 24)
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interrupt process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(12. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 25)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an effect control side timer interruption process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 25, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 23, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, a control signal is output to the movable body accessory motor 61 through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, main loop update processing for managing the main loop update cycle is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 26 to 29>
FIG. 26 to FIG. 29 show processing closely related to the prefetching notice effect among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 23). Hereinafter, a case where the “hold addition command”, “variation pattern allocation designation number command”, “variation pattern designation command”, and “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.

(13. Processing for receiving pending addition command: FIG. 26)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a pending addition command is received. This hold addition command is an effect control command transmitted in step S326 of the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10 or step S346 of the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG.

  In FIG. 26, when receiving the pending addition command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the content of the command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S711). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the pre-read information storage area, the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 A pre-read information storage area corresponding to the side) is provided. In addition, these pre-read information storage areas are provided with a hold 1 pre-read information storage area to a hold n pre-read information storage area (in this embodiment, n = 4) corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Prefetch determination result information for the number of balls can be stored. For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B707H”, the CPU 241 grasps the content of “special figure 1 hold 2 designation, strong SP reach A, and loss B” (prefetch fluctuation pattern X7). This is stored in the reserved 2 prefetch information storage area on the special symbol 1 side. As a result, it is possible to specify what kind of pre-reading determination result the existing operation holding ball has. In the case of “** 01H” (“**” on the MODE side is B5 to BE), “prefetching prohibited” is designated (see FIG. 39).

  Next, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the analysis information of the process in step S711 (step 712). If prefetching is prohibited (step S712: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S718 described later.

  If prefetching is not prohibited (step S712: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The “continuous notice counter” is a counter for setting a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of the pre-read notice effect. Specifically, when the current operation-holding ball is selected as the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is digested This is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being subject to execution of the pre-reading effect until it is subjected to the variable display operation. In the “continuous notice counter”, the value of the current number of suspended balls is stored for the above-described reason (see step S717 described later).

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), prefetch notice lottery processing is performed assuming that the prefetch notice lottery is permitted (step S714). In this pre-reading notice lottery process, based on the pre-reading variation pattern information, whether or not “holding display changing system (change system at winning) pre-reading notice effect” (hereinafter referred to as “holding pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed, and “image It is determined by lottery whether or not the display change system (change system at the start of change) pre-reading notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “background pre-reading notice effect”) is executable. Note that the pre-reading notice lottery is performed on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type in the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding balls. The presence / absence of the reach fluctuation pattern can be confirmed by checking the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 1 side if the pending addition command for this time relates to the action holding ball on the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 side Can be performed by checking the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 2 side. If the prefetch determination result information is “undefined (normal fluctuation / reach)”, the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation may be a reach fluctuation pattern. Is preferred.

  In this embodiment, only when generating the “hold pre-reading notice effect”, the “background pre-reading notice effect” is generated redundantly to clearly indicate which operation holding ball is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. At the same time, you will be able to win a big win. Accordingly, in the pre-reading notice lottery, (I) only the pre-reading pre-order notice effect can be executed, (II) both the pre-reading pre-order notice effect and the background pre-reading notice effect can be executed, (III) Three cases, such as whether or not to execute, are determined by lottery. Which case is determined depends on the “pre-reading notice lottery table (not shown)” associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern. Is determined. In this look-ahead notice lottery table, the above (III) has the lowest chance of winning a big hit, and the case of (II) tends to have a higher chance of winning a big win than the case of (I) above. The selectivity of (I) to (III) above is defined. Specifically, in consideration of the winning type determined by the main control unit 20 and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern, a reach type (for example, a weak SP reach A type or a weak SP reach) having a relatively low expectation of winning the big hit In the case of (B type), the selection rate of the above case (I) is relatively high, and in the case of a big win, or a reach type with a relatively high expectation degree of big win (for example, strong SP reach A type or strong SP reach) In the case of (B type), the selection rate in the case (II) is set to be relatively high. In the case of the normal variation pattern type, the selection rate of the case (III) is determined to be relatively high.

  In the prefetch notice lottery, in addition to the above (I) to (III), (IV) whether or not only the background prefetch notice effect can be executed may be included. When (V) a pre-reading effect (moving material pre-reading notice effect) by a movable object (not shown) is configured to be executable, the movable object is designated as “hold pre-reading notice effect” and / or “background”. A case where a lottery is performed with or without the pre-reading notice effect 'may be included. When (IV) and / or (V) are included, it is determined on the main control unit 20 side which of the cases (I) to (V) is likely to result in a high probability of winning big hits It can be freely determined in consideration of the selection rate of the selected winning type and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern.

  Next, as a result of the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714, it is determined that the pre-reading effect can be executed. In the case of (I), the pre-reading operation status is “01H”, and in the case of (II), the pre-reading operation status is “02H”. "Is determined not to execute any pre-reading notice in (III) above," 00H "is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 as the pre-reading operation status (step S715).

  Next, the prefetch determination operation status is determined (step 716). If the pre-reading operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: ≠ 00H), the number of suspended balls (the number of reserved memories) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B706H”, since the command is “special figure 1 hold 2 designation”, the continuous notice counter indicates “02H” indicating 2 holds. Is stored. As a result, the pre-reading notice lottery for a new operation holding ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by one each time the old action holding ball generated earlier is digested in the decorative symbol designation command receiving process of FIG. 29 described later.

  When the process proceeds to step S718, a pending addition display process is performed (step S718). In the hold addition display process, the effect data related to the hold display of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is stored in the hold display data storage area (hold display scenario setting area) of the RAM 243 based on the result of the hold prefetch notice lottery. Store. In the reserved display data storage area, the reserved display data storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved display data storage corresponding to the special symbol 1 is stored) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Area and special figure 2 hold display data storage area corresponding to special symbol 2). These hold display data storage areas are provided with a hold 1 display data storage area to a hold n display data storage area (n is the maximum hold display number: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each holds a maximum operation hold ball. It is possible to store presentation scenario data for several minutes of hold display. The CPU 241 can specify what kind of hold display is to be performed on the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 with reference to the hold display effect scenario data in the hold display data storage area. Yes.

  With respect to the above-described presentation scenario for hold display, if the “prefetching notice lottery” in step S714 is not won (lost) (prefetching notice operation status = 00H), the presentation data for normal holding display (for example, the hold icon) ("Blue" effect data) is stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won (pre-reading notice operation status ≠ 00H), the presentation data for the hold pre-read notice (dedicated hold display) (for example, the hold icon “blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow”) Production data) is stored. Note that the number of colors to be reserved is determined based on the “reserved color selection table (not shown) associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. ) ". In this reserved color selection table, the selection rate of the reserved color is determined so that the big hit winning expectation tends to be high due to the relationship of “blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color (true)”. For example, “Large hit” is more likely to be selected than “Lost”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning a big hit, a reserved color with a high expectation level for winning a big hit will be selected with a high probability. Yes.

  In this embodiment, when the “pre-reading notice lottery” is won, the color of the holding icon related to the action holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is, for example, one of yellow, green, red, or rainbow colors (usually It changes to blue), and the hold display appears continuously until the operation hold ball is digested (until it is used for the variable display operation) (FIG. 6 (1)). To (4)). Although details will be described later, when the “background prefetching notice effect” is also selected at the same time, the prefetching notice effect (lightning effect) by the exclusive notice image (lightning image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 together with the hold prefetching notice effect. Appearing, the pre-reading notice effect (lightning effect) by the lightning image appears continuously (see FIGS. 6 (1) to (4)).

  The pre-reading notice lottery process of step S714 is performed based on the pre-reading determination result (first pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 1 side or second pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 2 side) with the effect start condition (pre-reading determination). It functions as a notice execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute a prefetch notice effect that notifies information related to the prefetch determination result on the condition that an effect control command including information (hold addition command) has been received. Further, in the processing of step S718 or steps S758 to S764 described later, when the notice execution determination means determines that the notice effect can be executed, the pre-read notice effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36). It works as a notice effect control means for controlling the appearance.

  In the present embodiment, the form in which the pre-reading notice effect of both the hold display change system and the image display change system is generated by the image display on the liquid crystal display device 36 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display system is configured so that the pre-reading notice effect of the image display change system can be displayed by the separate display means by the liquid crystal display device 36 by the holding display provided at the appropriate position of the pachinko machine 1. May be. In this case, the advance notice control means includes a hold prefetch notice control effect means for controlling the appearance of the hold display change type prefetch notice effect on a dedicated hold indicator (not shown), and a decorative symbol display means ( The liquid crystal display device 36) may include a function unit as image prefetching notice control means for controlling the appearance of the image display changing system prefetching notice effect. Further, the pre-reading notice effect may be expressed by an operation mode of a movable body accessory (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the notice effect control means may include a movable body control means for controlling the appearance of the pre-read notice effect for the movable object.

(14. Fluctuation pattern distribution designation number command reception processing: FIG. 27)
In this embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, a “variation pattern allocation designation number command” including the variation pattern allocation designation number which is the current gaming state information is displayed for each symbol variation display operation. It transmits to a production | presentation control part from the main control part (step S407, S413, S416 of FIG. 15).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern distribution designation number command is received. When the variation pattern allocation designation number command is received, this is analyzed, the current gaming state is grasped, and the data is set (step S721). As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is 00H when the gaming state is normally A, 01H when normally B, 02H when normally C, and 03H when probability is being changed.

(15. Fluctuation pattern designation command reception processing: FIG. 28)
In this embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the consistency with the “variation pattern allocation designation number command” including the variation pattern allocation designation number which is the current game state information is determined. Inappropriate performance processing is prevented when inconsistency occurs between commands. In the case of this embodiment, this consistency determination is performed for the variation pattern assignment designation number command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol designation command transmitted in time series in steps S407, S413, and S416 in FIG. First, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the consistency between the variation pattern allocation designation number command and the variation pattern designation command is judged, and then when the decoration symbol designation command is received, the variation pattern designation command and the ornament symbol designation command are received. The determination is made sequentially in time sequence, such as determining the consistency with. This is because the determination process becomes easier as compared with the case where the consistency between the three patterns of the variation pattern allocation designation number command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol designation command is judged simultaneously.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S413 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 28, when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, the content of the command is first analyzed (step S731), the variation pattern information of the special symbol as the content is obtained, and the RAM 243 is obtained. In the predetermined area (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (special symbol determination data information) included in the decorative symbol designation command, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game is determined.

  Next, proceeding to step S733, the game state (provisional game state to be determined) indicated by the change pattern information stored at step S732 is set to the change pattern allocation designation number set at step S721 in FIG. The consistency is determined by comparing with a known gaming state (actual gaming state to be referred to) indicated by (Tcode: 00H, 01H, 02H, 03H).

  To explain, the variation pattern designation command has a distinction of the winning type (win / failed type) of big hit, small hit, or lost, but the gaming state is the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode: 00H, 01H). , 02H, 03H), and the variation pattern designation command selected while staying in any of the gaming states of normal A, normal B, normal C, and probability change. Therefore, if the content of the received variation pattern designation command is analyzed on the side of the effect control unit, the immediate gaming state information for each time, that is, during normal A, normal B, normal C, from the type of the analyzed variation pattern, It is possible to obtain information as to which of the gaming states that are being probabilistically changed, the variation pattern that has occurred while staying in the gaming state. Therefore, in this step S732, by knowing under which gaming state the variation pattern occurs, the type of gaming state when the variation pattern is selected can be acquired.

  Therefore, in step S733, the game state information indicated by the variation pattern information of the received variation pattern designation command (normal A, normal B, normal C, or probable) is determined as a determination target, and in step S721 of FIG. The actual gaming state indicated by the set variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode, that is, the current gaming state information (Tcode: 00H during normal A, 01H during normal B, 02H during normal C, probable change) 03H) is used as a reference object, and the two are compared to determine consistency. In this way, the consistency between the received variation pattern designation command and variation pattern distribution designation number command is determined.

(T-13: Command consistency determination table: FIGS. 53 to 55)
53 to 55 are “command consistency determination tables” that are referred to when determining consistency between commands of the variation pattern allocation designation number command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative symbol designation command. A list including measures depending on the suitability of sex is collected and stored in the ROM 242 of the effect control unit 24. This command consistency determination table is in accordance with the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode (usually 00H during normal A, 01H during normal B, 02H during normal C, 03H during probability change). It consists of a plurality of classified types (three types in this example) of determination tables (FIGS. 53 to 55). Of these, the first determination table (FIG. 53) is a command consistency determination table when the gaming state indicated by Tcode is “normal A or normal B (Tcode: 00H, 01H), second determination table (FIG. 54). Is the command consistency determination table when the gaming state indicated by Tcode is normal C (Tcode: 02H), and the third determination table (FIG. 55) is when the gaming state indicated by Tcode is under certainty (Tcode: 03H). This is a command consistency judgment table.

  The command consistency determination tables of FIGS. 53 to 55 are provided with a variation pattern distribution designation number command column, a variation pattern designation command column, and a decorative symbol designation command column in order from the left to the right in accordance with the order of command reception timing. The rightmost column that follows this is the staging operation that is adopted as a measure in accordance with the judgment result of the consistency between the commands, especially the staging operation that informs that when the judgment result is inconsistent (inconsistent It is an explanation column for explaining the content of the notification effect.

  In each command consistency determination table of FIGS. 53 to 55, the leftmost variation pattern allocation designation number command column has the variation pattern designation command in the variation pattern designation command column on the right side of the variation pattern allocation designation number command. It is divided into two areas, upper and lower, depending on whether or not they match. In the upper row, the specification content of the variation pattern designation command (the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern information) is “matched” with the designation content of the variation pattern allocation designation number command (the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern assignment designation number). In other words, it is a divided area (matching area) that summarizes the case where the production mode that can appear is designated. In the lower row, the specification content of the variation pattern designation command (the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern information) is inconsistent with the specification content of the variation pattern allocation designation number command (the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern assignment designation number). In other words, it is a segmented area (inconsistent area) indicating that a production mode that cannot be displayed is designated.

  As for the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the consistency between the winning type obtained by the variation pattern designation command and the winning category obtained by the decoration symbol designation command is determined. This will be described later together with the contents of the related command consistency determination table.

(15-1. Consistency determination between fluctuation pattern allocation designation number command and fluctuation pattern designation command: first consistency judgment)
(I) When the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern information is consistent with the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode Among the variation pattern types, the “hit variation patterns A1, A4˜ “A15” and “losing variation patterns H1 to H16” in the list of loss variation pattern designation commands (FIG. 49) should appear when the gaming state is normal A or normal B (Tcode: 00H, 01H). Similarly, “hit variation patterns A2, A16 to A18” in FIG. 48 and “losing variation patterns H17 to H20” in FIG. 49 should appear when the gaming state is normal C (Tcode: 02H). Further, “hit variation patterns A3, A19 to A21” in FIG. 48 and “losing variation patterns H21 to H24” in FIG. 49 should appear when the gaming state is under certainty (Tcode: 03H).

  Therefore, “hit fluctuation patterns A1, A4 to A15” in the hit fluctuation pattern designation command list (FIG. 48) and “lost fluctuation patterns H1 to H16” in the loss fluctuation pattern designation command list (FIG. 49) appear. In the normal A (Tcode: 00H) or normal B (Tcode: 01H) scheduled, the gaming state indicated by the variable pattern assignment designation number command (00H in normal A, normal The relationship between 01H in B, normal 02H in normal C, 02H in probability change, and 03H in normal change) is normal, and therefore the consistency determination (first consistency determination) in step S733 is the received variation pattern designation. The command was a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern type under appropriate gaming conditions (designating a playable mode That command: belonging to the upper part of FIG. 53), i.e. determines to matching.

  Similarly, if “hit fluctuation pattern A2, A16 to A18” or “lack fluctuation pattern H17 to H20” appears in the normal C where the appearance is scheduled (Tcode: 02H), it is received. The gaming state indicated by the variation pattern designation command is the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern assignment designation number command (00H when in normal A, 01H during normal B, 02H during normal C, 03H when under certainty change) Therefore, in the determination of the consistency in step S733, the received variation pattern designation command was an appropriate variation pattern designation command (a command for designating a rendering mode that can appear: belongs to the upper part of FIG. 54). That is, it is determined that they are consistent.

  Similarly, if the “hit variation pattern A3, A19 to A21” or “loss variation pattern H21 to H24” appears in the probability variation (Tcode: 03H) where the appearance is scheduled, the variation pattern Since the relationship with the gaming state indicated by the distribution designation number command (00H in normal A, 01H in normal B, 02H in normal C, 03H in probability change) is appropriate, the matching in step S733 In the determination of the nature, it is determined that the received variation pattern designation command is an appropriate variation pattern designation command (command for designating a rendering mode that can appear: belonging to the upper part of FIG. 55), that is, matching.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the current game state is consistent as described above, the suitability of the combination of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command is also determined sequentially. If these commands are in a consistent state, the fluctuation display mode is performed in the normal (normal) fluctuation display mode or stop display mode, and the special fluctuation display mode (swing fluctuation of the symbol) is stopped. The display mode is not displayed. The “fluctuation fluctuation” mentioned here is not a fluctuation display mode in which the decorative pattern moves or changes greatly within the display screen or between the screen and the outside of the screen as in the normal pattern fluctuation display operation. This is a variation display mode (swing display mode) of a decorative symbol that stagnate and swings small, such as a variation display mode that swings small so as to wave up and down when the symbol stops.

(Ii) When the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern information is not consistent with the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode (a) “Hit variation patterns A1, A4 to A15” in FIG. 48 or “Loss variation pattern H1” in FIG. ˜H16 ”appears in the normal C or probability change (Tcode: 02H, 03H) where the appearance is not scheduled (lower part of FIG. 53), (b)“ hit fluctuation pattern A2, A16-A18 "and" loss variation pattern H17-H20 "in FIG. 49 appear in normal A, B or probability change (Tcode: 00H, 01H, 03H) where the appearance is not scheduled. (Lower part of FIG. 54), (c) “Hit fluctuation pattern A3, A19 to A21” in FIG. 48 and “Loss fluctuation pattern in FIG. If “H21 to H24” are cases (Tcode: 00H, 01H, 02H) that appear in normal A, B, and C that are not expected to appear (lower row in FIG. 55), a variation pattern is designated. Since the relationship between the command and the gaming state when it is received (00H in normal A, 01H in normal B, 02H in normal C, 03H in probability change) is inconsistent, step S733 In order to determine consistency, the received variation pattern designation command indicates that the game state indicated by it is inconsistent with the current game state of the default, and an inappropriate variation pattern designation command (designating a rendering mode that cannot be displayed) is specified. Command to belong to: the lower part of FIGS. 53 to 55).

  In addition, since it is determined that the gaming state is “inconsistent” in the variation pattern designation command, a variation display operation (inconsistency notification operation) for notifying inconsistency is executed. Here, it is assumed that inconsistency notification is performed according to the variation display mode of the decorative design, and the combination of the display design “426” appears on the liquid crystal display screen, and this is shaken and displayed.

  When the determination of the consistency is completed, the process proceeds from step S733 to step S734, and the determination result is “match” according to the determination result of the consistency between the above-described variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the winning type of the variation pattern. If it is (Step S734: YES), the process exits the variation pattern designation command reception process without doing anything. If the determination result is “inconsistent” (step S734: NO), the “inconsistent flag” is set (inconsistent flag = 1), and the stopped symbol information of a specific display symbol (here “426”) Is set (steps S735 and S736), and the variation pattern designation command reception process is exited.

  When the stop symbol information is set in this way, the variation display mode and the stop display mode of the decorative symbol become the abnormal time variation display mode and the abnormal time stop display mode different from those at the time of matching. In this example, the symbol of the display symbol “426” is displayed. Fluctuation fluctuates with the combination, and after the fluctuation time elapses, it stops with the combination of symbols “426”. When this “abnormal time fluctuation display mode” is displayed, it is a configuration in which no abnormal effects naturally appear.

  Note that the fluctuation display mode and stop display mode related to the design fluctuation display operation of the decorative pattern is “426”, and the fluctuation variation is caused by the fact that the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the winning type of the variation pattern cannot appear. On the other hand, it is assumed that the fluctuation variation at “246” is a case where the winning type of the variation pattern and the winning type (symbol type) of the decorative design designation command are not matched. Separated.

(16. Decoration design designation command reception processing: FIG. 29)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing processing when a decorative design designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S416 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. In this process, based on the variation pattern winning type information obtained by the variation pattern designation command receiving process of FIG. 28 and the winning type information obtained by the received decoration symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command and the ornament symbol designation The consistency with the command is determined. In addition, effects during the symbol display game (various notice effects) and display patterns of decoration symbols (temporary stop symbols, reach symbols, stop decoration symbols, etc.) are determined. Is configured.

  In FIG. 29, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) analyzes the content of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the content (step S751).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the inconsistency flag is 1 (step S752). In FIG. 28, if the variation pattern designation command is determined to be inconsistent with respect to the variation pattern distribution designation number command, the inconsistency flag has already been set to 1 (step S752: YES). The “variation start process at mismatch” is executed. The contents of the effect operation process at the time of inconsistency are fluctuated in a display manner of a decorative pattern of “426” or “246” according to the determination tables of FIGS. Here, the fluctuation is changed in the display mode of the decorative symbol “426” set in step S736. As the effect operation process at the time of inconsistency, there are other effects dedicated to defects (for example, effects that do not appear in normal games (dark effects that darken the background, effects that cause a defect character to appear) Etc.) can be set and displayed with images, sound, light, etc.

<16-1. Consistency determination between change pattern designation command and decorative design designation command: second consistency judgment>
In step S753, the command consistency determination tables of FIGS. 53 to 55 are acquired, and with reference to this, whether or not the combination of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command received in time order is appropriate. (2) Consistency determination (second consistency determination) is executed. This second consistency determination is executed when the result of the first consistency determination described above is “consistency”, that is, in the case of step S752: NO (inconsistency flag = 0). In each of the 55 command consistency determination tables, it is not necessary to consider the lower part, and it is only necessary to determine the cases where the upper part of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are consistent. This second consistency determination accurately determines the consistency between the winning type information obtained by the variation pattern designation command and the winning classification information obtained by the decorative symbol designation command.

  Here, the “winning type information” indicates whether it is a big hit, a loss or a small hit (2R abrupt), and the “winning type information” is a type of the big hit (15R probability variation, 10R probability variation, 2R This shows a more detailed classification of the difference in probability), the type of loss (separation of loss A, B, and C), and the type of small hit (separate of small hits A, B, and C). Therefore, the winning type information obtained by the variation pattern designation command includes a part of the winning type information. In other words, the winning type information obtained by the change pattern designation command does not classify the details as the winning type, but includes type information that can be classified as big hit, lost, per 2R or small hit. Yes. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern designation commands shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are classified into subcategories according to the fluctuation pattern type, and are rearranged at the level of the winning classification information. It can be reclassified into the middle category like the contents of.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating the big hit type, the small hit, and the loss. The lower byte (EVENT) side designates a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command can be classified as the contents of the decorative symbol designation command column in the upper part of FIGS.

  When the change pattern is reclassified to the level of the winning category information, the hit change pattern designation command (FIG. 48) can be classified into the following middle categories (a) to (e). (A) Command (A100H to A102H) for designating “Round variation pattern A1 to A3H” dedicated to 2R short open latency and small hits (b) Command to designate SP reach “Battery variation pattern A4 to A15” (A200H to (A20BH), (c) Commands (A20CH to A20EH) for specifying the special reach “variation patterns A16 to A18”, (d) Commands (A20FH to A211H) for specifying the reach “variation patterns A19 to A21” during the probability variation. Note that there is no fluctuation pattern dedicated to 2R short open latency / small hits in the hit fluctuation pattern during probability change. This is because in the present embodiment, the 2R short-opening latent big hit and the small hit are excluded from the symbol lottery on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 32B).

  Further, in the case of the loss variation pattern designation command (FIG. 49), it is divided into the middle as shown in the following (f) to (h). (F) Normal fluctuation 12S, normal fluctuation 8S, normal fluctuation 3S, normal reach and SP reach “variation patterns H1 to H16” commands (A000H to A00FH), (g) special normal fluctuation 10S (normal C) and special reach (Normal C) Command (A010H to A013H) for designating “variation patterns H17 to H20”, (h) Command for designating “variation patterns H21 to H24” for normal variation 2S (probability variation) and probability variation (probability variation) (A014H) ~ A017H).

(I) Determination in case of normal A or normal B (Tcode: 00H, 01H) (FIG. 53) In normal A or normal B (upper part of FIG. 53), the variation pattern A1 (2R short) of the variation pattern designation command For the combination that the decoration designating command specifies “2R short open latency / small hit” for the open latency / small hit win), the consistency judgment of both commands is “match” A combination in which a decorative operation including a symbol variation display operation and a stop display mode of a decorative symbol is performed normally, but the decorative symbol designation command designates “losing A to C” or “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit”. Is “inconsistent”, the fluctuation is changed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  Also, in normal A or normal B (upper part of FIG. 53), the decorative symbol designating command designates “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” for the variation patterns A4 to A15 (for SP reach) of the variation pattern designating command. Even in the case of the combination, the consistency judgment of both commands is “consistency”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but the decorative symbol designation command is “losing A to C” or “2R short open latency”. Since the combination when “/ small hit” is designated is “inconsistent”, the fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  In addition, during normal A or normal B (upper part of FIG. 53), the decorative symbol designating command indicates “loss A to C” with respect to the loss variation patterns H1 to A16 (normal variation, normal reach or SP reach) of the variation pattern designation command. Even in the case of the designated combination, the consistency judgment of both commands is “consistency”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but the decorative symbol designation command is “2R short open latency / small hit” or “ Since the combination when “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” is designated is “mismatch”, the fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

(Ii) Judgment in case of normal C (Tcode: 02H) (FIG. 54) In normal C (upper part of FIG. 54), a decorative design designation command for hit variation pattern A2 (2R short open latency / small hit) Is a combination in which “2R short open latency / small hit” is designated, the consistency judgment of both commands is “match”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation. Since the combination when “losing A to C” or “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” is designated is “mismatch”, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display mode “246” is performed as the effect operation content. .

  In the case of a combination in which the decoration symbol designation command designates “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” for hit variation patterns A16 to A18 (special reach) in normal C (upper row in FIG. 54), both commands The consistency judgment is “consistency”, and normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but “decoration A to C” or “2R short open latency / small hit” is specified by the decorative symbol designation command. Since the combination is “mismatched”, the fluctuation is changed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  During normal C (upper part of FIG. 54), the decorative symbol designation command designates “lost A to C” for the loss variation patterns H17 to H20 (special normal variation, special reach, normal variation 2S, probability variation reach). In the case of the combination, the consistency judgment of both commands is “consistency”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but the decorative symbol designation command is “2R short open latency / small hit” or “10R / Since the combination when “15R long open probability variation big hit” is designated is “mismatch”, the fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  In the present embodiment, on the special figure 1 side, the fluctuation pattern H17 (special normal fluctuation 10s) is selected in the case of the loss A, and the fluctuation patterns H18 to H20 (special reach) are selected in the case of the loss B or the loss C. On the special figure 2 side, the loss fluctuation pattern H17 (special normal fluctuation 10s) is selected for any of the loss A to C (see FIGS. 43, 45, and 47). Therefore, it is preferable to judge the correct consistency taking into consideration the special symbol type to be changed this time, but here, as already explained, it is classified into the middle category of “losing” to judge consistency, The special symbol type to be changed this time is not determined.

  However, the determination may be made in consideration of the special symbol type to be changed this time. In this case, a command (special symbol type designation command (fourth symbol) including information related to the special symbol N changing flag (information related to the ON / OFF state of the special symbol 1 changing flag and the special symbol 2 changing flag)). Control command)) and transmit this to the effect control unit 24 (transmission timing is, for example, during the processing of steps S414 to S417 in FIG. 15), and the effect control unit 24 grasps information on the special symbol type By doing so, it is possible to determine the consistency with the special symbol type, the variation pattern, and the winning type (here, the loss type). Further, in the case of a configuration in which a unique variation pattern is selected corresponding to each of the loss A to C, as a configuration for determining the consistency between the unique variation variation pattern and the loss type designated by the decorative design designation command. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, during the probability change, regardless of the special symbol type, the variation pattern H21 (normal variation 2s) is selected in the case of the loss A, and the variation patterns H22 to H24 are selected in the case of the loss B and C. (See FIGS. 43, 45, and 47). In this case, since it is similar to the case where unique variation patterns are selected corresponding to the above-described loses A to C, for example, the consistency between the variation patterns H21 to H24 and the loss type is determined. It is good also as a structure of these. For example, in the case of a combination in which the decorative design designation command designates “losing A” for the variation pattern H21, the consistency judgment of both commands is “consistent”, and the decorative design designation command is “losing B, C”. , “2R short open latency / small hit” or “10R / 15R long open probability variable big hit” is specified, it can be determined that the combination is “mismatched”.

(Iii) Judgment in case of probability change (Tcode: 03H) (Fig. 55) During probability change (upper part of Fig. 55), a decorative design designation command for the hit variation pattern A3 (for 2R short open latency / small hit win) Is a combination in which “2R short open latency / small hit” is designated, the consistency judgment of both commands is “match”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation. Since the combination when “losing A to C” or “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” is designated is “mismatch”, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display mode “246” is performed as the effect operation content. .

  In the case of a combination in which the decorative design designation command designates “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” for the hit fluctuation patterns A19 to A21 (reach during probability change) during probability change (upper part of FIG. 55), both commands The consistency judgment is “consistency”, and normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but “decoration A to C” or “2R short open latency / small hit” is specified by the decorative symbol designation command. Since the combination is “mismatched”, the fluctuation is changed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  In the case of a combination in which the decorative symbol designation command designates “losing A to C” with respect to the loss variation patterns H21 to H24 (normal variation 2S, probability variation reach) during probability variation (the upper part of FIG. 55), The command consistency judgment is “match”, and the normal operation is performed as the symbol variation display operation, but the decorative symbol designation command designates “2R short open latency / small hit” or “10R / 15R long open probability variable big hit”. Since the combination is “inconsistent”, the fluctuation is changed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

(16-2. Processing at the time of mismatching and matching)
Returning to FIG. 29, when the second consistency determination is completed as described above, the process proceeds from step S753 to step S754. If the determination result is “inconsistency” (step S754: NO), the display pattern “ After “246” is set (step S765), the process proceeds to the fluctuation start process at the time of mismatch in step S766, and the fluctuation is changed in the decorative symbol display mode of “246” as the contents of the effect operation (variation display operation).

  When the above-described second consistency determination result is “match” (step S754: YES), various types of decoration symbol stop symbol lottery processing (step 755) to decoration symbol variation start are performed as normal effect processing. A setting process (step S764) is performed and the process returns.

  Steps 755 to S764 include processing related to continuous notice, and processing is performed as follows.

  In the decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process (step S755), based on the variation pattern information obtained in the process of step S732 and the winning type information included in the received decorative symbol designation command, the left symbol / medium to be finally stopped The symbol / right symbol (combination of decorative symbols) is determined by lottery. For example, when the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated for reach production and the winning type information is a 15R long release probability variation big hit, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 15R long release probability variation big hit should be determined. First, the left symbol is determined by lottery, then the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can be reached are determined as the right symbol, and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, the 15R long open probability change big hit is related The middle symbol is determined so that the decorated symbol sequence is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice counter is zero (step S756). If the continuous notice counter is zero (step S756: YES), the process proceeds to step S760 without doing anything.

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S756: NO), then the prefetch operation status is acquired and determined (step S757). If the prefetch operation status is other than “02H” (step S757: ≠ 02H), the process proceeds to step S760 without doing anything.

  If the pre-reading operation status is “02H” (step S757: = 02H), the background pre-reading notice effect is executed in this case, so the process proceeds to step S758, and the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step S758). In this background prefetching notice setting process, first, one of the background prefetching notice effects is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of background prefetching notice effects based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732. For example, one lightning effect is selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of lightning effects including lightning effects of lightning strikes, lightning effects of lightning strikes of lightning strikes, and lightning effects of lightning strikes. . Which lightning effect is to be generated is determined by a “lightning effect selection table (not shown)” associated with the variation pattern. In this lightning effect selection table, the selection rate of the lightning effect type is determined so that the expectation level for winning a big hit tends to be high due to the relationship “lightning lightning <medium lightning <strong lightning”.

  As already explained, since the “look-ahead variation pattern” determined at the time of winning a prize and the “basic pattern related to the variation pattern at the start of variation” determined at the start of variation, substantially the same pattern type is selected. The expectation of winning a big hit with the hold color of the hold icon and the expectation of winning a big hit with lightning are closely related. In more detail, the chances of winning big wins are indicated more clearly when the hold-ahead preview effect and the background-ahead preview effect appear more than when the hold-ahead preview effect appears alone. It has become. For example, if the reserved color is “red” and the lightning effect is “strong lightning”, the expectation of winning the jackpot will increase dramatically, but even if the reserved color is “red”, the lightning effect will be “weak lightning”. If this is the case, the expectation of winning a big hit will be lower than that. As described above, in the present embodiment, a clearer win-winning expectation degree is suggested when a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are mixed than when a single pre-reading notice effect appears.

  In the background prefetching notice setting process, the number of executions of the background prefetching notice effect is set to the same value as the value of the continuous counter (the value of the continuous counter is stored in the background notice execution counter), and the prefetching operation status is switched to “00H” ( 00H is stored in the pre-read operation status). As a result, when it is determined that the background pre-reading notice effect is to be executed when the one hold addition command is received, the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the oldest action-holding ball generated first. When another subsequent hold addition command is received, this background prefetching notice setting process is not performed unless the continuous notice counter is zero and the prefetching operation status is “02H”. In other words, in the present embodiment, unless the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is digested, a new prefetching notice effect is not generated, and the generation of duplicate prefetching notice effects is prohibited.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S759, 1 is subtracted from the continuous notice counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S759).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the background notice execution counter is zero (step S760). If the background notice execution counter is not zero (step S760: NO), 1 is subtracted from the background notice execution counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S761), and it is assumed that the background prefetching notice effect is executed, step S762. Proceed to the production scenario setting process with lightning production. On the other hand, if the background notice execution counter is zero (step S760: YES), the background prefetch notice effect is not executed, and the process proceeds to the effect scenario setting process without lightning effect in step S763.

  In the effect scenario setting process with lightning effect in step S762, an effect scenario including a lightning effect that is a background look-ahead notice is determined as a notice effect that appears during the current decorative symbol variation display game. Thus, when one of the lightning effects is selected as the background prefetching notice effect, a lightning image appears in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 at the start of the change (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, in the lightning effect-free effect scenario setting process in step S763, an effect scenario excluding the lightning effect that is the background pre-reading notice is determined. The production scenario determines multiple types of notice production as part production based on the information (variation pattern information, winning type, etc.) included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command and the current production mode. An effect scenario is constructed, and this data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the above-described effect scenario setting process is completed, various setting processes required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game are performed (step S764). Here, various settings required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game, including a hold display shift process (hold display shift process) accompanying the digestion of the operation hold ball, are performed. In the hold display shift process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) as the decorative symbol variation effect is started. Display data storage area and hold 4 display data storage area) are overwritten on the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. . Since the display scenario data for hold display is not stored in the hold display data storage area that is an empty area, in this case, the hold display effect is not performed, and the corresponding display location is displayed as an unlit state. Thereby, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect scenario stored in the on-hold display data storage area, and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted by one to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed. Note that the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203 is also stored in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the hold n prefetch information storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) in the same manner as the above-described shift processing of the hold display data storage area. The prefetch determination result information is overwritten in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to 'n-1', an empty area is provided in the hold 4 prefetch information storage area, and the next hold addition command is received. An area for storing the result information is secured.

  When the process of step S764 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game is started. In this way, the effect control unit 24 receives the first control command (holding addition command), and the symbol game (symbol variation) in which the predetermined variation start condition is not satisfied and the holding information is not yet digested. A display effect control means for controlling the appearance of a notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying information about what display result of the display result of the symbol game based on the hold information is, On the condition that the control command (variation pattern designation command) is received (in this embodiment, on the condition that the decorative symbol designation command following the fluctuation pattern designation command is received), the effect display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) 36. A symbol game execution control means for starting execution of the decorative symbol game (decorative symbol variation display game) in 36) is included.

(17. Effects of the present embodiment)
According to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to this embodiment, before the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command is determined, first, for the variation pattern designation command, the gaming state at the time of variation pattern selection indicated by the command is changed to the variation pattern distribution. It is determined whether or not the current gaming state indicated by the designated number command is consistent (first consistency judgment), and the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern designation command is the current game indicated by the variation pattern allocation designation number command. It is confirmed that it matches the state. If it is determined that the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern designation command that does not match the current gaming state, the variation pattern designation command is determined to be inappropriate. Based on the command, the normal performance operation (decorative display mode and / or stop display mode of the decorative design) that should have been normally performed is canceled, and instead, the decorative symbol swings and fluctuates at “426”. An effect of the stop display mode is made to appear. Therefore, when the gaming state is a variation pattern designation command that does not match the current gaming state, it is notified that the variation pattern designation command is inconsistent with the current gaming state, and based on the variation pattern designation command. The inconvenience that inappropriate production appears will be prevented.

  More specifically, when the first consistency determination is inconsistent, the normal rendering operation is not performed, so that the following undesirable rendering is prevented. In other words, if the received variation pattern designation command has changed to a variation pattern designation command whose gaming state does not match the current gaming state due to noise or the like, conventionally, this variation pattern designation command is also an appropriate variation pattern designation command. Because it is treated as a command, for example, during a symbol variation display operation, an effect under the background effect of 'Spring' under the 'normal effect mode' (for example, an effect in which cherry blossom petals are scattered) should appear. Allowed the occurrence of an event under the 'winter' background effect (for example, a snow falling effect) that should appear under the 'reproduction mode', resulting in a premium effect for the player (big hit confirmed) However, according to the present embodiment, such an inconvenient production does not occur.

  In the first consistency determination described above, the above processing can be performed without determining the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command. For example, suppose only the consistency between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command is determined without confirming whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is appropriate in light of the current gaming state. And In this determination method, for example, in the case of FIG. 53, regardless of whether it belongs to the upper stage or the lower stage, (i) the case of “2R short open latency / small hit” for “hit fluctuation patterns A1 to A3”, (Ii) The case of “10R / 15R long open probability variation big hit” for “hit variation patterns A4 to A15” and the case of (iii) “loss A to C” for “loss variation patterns H1 to A16” are all matched. Therefore, it is determined that the command set is appropriate. However, in this embodiment, if the gaming state indicated by the received variation pattern designation command is “Normal C or Probably Changing”, the current gaming state indicated by the variation pattern allocation designation number Tcode is “Normal A or Normal B”. It is determined that there is no match with a certain thing, and it is distinguished as belonging to the case shown in the lower part of FIG. Therefore, if the first consistency determination reveals that the case is the case shown in the lower part of FIG. 53, the consistency determination between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command is further performed for this case. You don't have to.

  In the present embodiment, the received variation pattern designation command has been confirmed to be appropriate in light of the current gaming state by the first consistency determination (the upper cases of FIGS. 53 to 4). The first consistency determination and the second consistency are determined in order to determine the consistency (second consistency determination) between the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command. It is possible to distinguish which judgment result of the judgment is inconsistent (YES or NO in step S754), and in the form of informing this distinction, it is possible to take measures in case of mismatch (steps S765 to S766). .

  In the second consistency determination, prior to execution of the decorative symbol variation display operation in the liquid crystal display device 36, the winning type information indicated by the variation pattern designation command received in time series and the winning symbol indicated by the ornament symbol designation command are displayed. Consistency is determined for the combination with the type information, and if the determination result is inconsistent (other than the assumed combination), based on the combination of the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command. In order to cancel the normal (normal) performance operation (fluctuating display operation) that should have been performed, and instead notify the fact that the combination is not as expected, The variable display operation is performed in the variable display mode and / or the stop display mode. As a specific example, the decorative symbol is swayed and changed with “246”. Also in this case, since it has been confirmed that the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern information is an appropriate variation pattern designation command that matches the actual gaming state, it appears under the above-described inconvenience, that is, the “normal effect mode”. Under the 'Spring' background production, a production that matches the season 'Spring' should appear, but the 'Winter' background should appear under the "Probability Production Mode". It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the production under the performance (the production of snow falls) appears and the production of the snow falling in spite of the season “spring” appears.

  Examples of cases relating to the second consistency determination include the following cases. This is an unexpected combination when a change pattern designation command or decorative symbol designation command sent from the main control unit to the production control unit is changed due to some cause such as noise or momentary power failure when the production appears. This is the case.

  As a typical example, it is particularly inconvenient, for example, that the fluctuation variation pattern designation command “A000H” of the normal variation 12 s in FIG. 49 designates the weak SP reach A1 of the variation pattern in FIG. 48 due to noise. This is a case where information on the variation pattern is sent to the effect control unit even though the variation is lost, such as having changed to “A200H”. An event that can occur in this case is, for example, an undesired phenomenon that the next symbol variation display operation starts without any problem despite the appearance of a certain effect such as a premium effect. This inconvenience is also caused by performing the second consistency determination process of the present embodiment and not performing a normal symbol variation display operation as a measure in the case where the determination result is inconsistency. Occurrence of the above-mentioned effects derived from the display operation is also prevented.

  Although it is inconvenient, the degree is small when information on the loss variation pattern is sent when the hit variation display operation is to be performed. In this case, the main control unit side processes the current symbol variation as “winning”, and the effect control unit side performs rendering operation (variation display operation) processing as “losing”. As a result, after the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the special symbol (decorated symbol) has stopped, the big hit opening effect is suddenly started and the big hit game is executed. However, in this case, although the player is surprised, it is not a disadvantage for the player, so this case is an acceptable mismatch case. In the case of the present embodiment, such inconvenience is prevented from occurring by the second consistency determination process and the measure when the determination result is inconsistent (normal operation is not performed).

<Modification>
In the above embodiment, as a process at the time of inconsistency, when the first consistency determination result is inconsistent as the effect operation content, the decorative pattern is shaken and varied in a variation display mode different from the normal time, and then the loss of When the display is stopped in the stop display mode “426” and the second consistency determination result is inconsistent, the decorative symbol is shaken and changed in a different display mode from that in the normal state, and then the stop display of the loss is displayed. It is stopped in the mode “246”.

  However, as a process at the time of inconsistency, only the variable display mode may be different from the normal time among the decorative symbol variable display mode and the stop display mode, or only the stop display mode may be different from the normal time. In addition, both the variation display mode and the stop display mode of the decorative symbol may be different from the normal time. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the stop display pattern is “246” or “426”, but the decorative pattern is “????” → “break eyes (losing eyes)” or “??? It is good also as a stop display aspect stopped with "?". Depending on the problem, it may be processed as a variation in loss on the side of the effect control unit, or may be processed as a hit on the side of the main control unit. Therefore, a special chance may be displayed in consideration of this case.

  In addition, as a process at the time of inconsistency, the decorative symbol variation display mode and / or the stop display mode are selected depending on whether the first consistency determination result is inconsistent or the second consistency determination result is inconsistent. It may be different. For example, when the first consistency determination is inconsistent (in the case of “426” series), the combination of the display symbols “426” is vigorously shaken up and down or left and right, and the enlargement / reduction is repeated so as to hit a large heartbeat. When the second consistency judgment is inconsistent (when using the “246” system), the combination of the display pattern “246” is reduced up and down or left and right to the left and right to fluctuate or pulsate slightly. The operation may be repeated. Further, in addition to the case of performing the variable display operation in the variable display mode and / or the stop display mode different from the normal time, the variable display may be simply stopped without performing such a variable display operation.

  Further, in addition to or different from the change display mode and / or the stop display mode in the decorative display change display operation, a defect-specific effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Specifically, for example, in the variation start process (step S766) at the time of inconsistency during the decorative symbol designation command reception process of FIG. 29, the “defect-only effect” is set, and the “background is darkened” is set. It is possible to make a production such as “activate it”.

  In FIG. 50, the game state types according to the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) are classified into normal A, normal B, normal C (low probability), normal C (latency), and probability variation. A distinction between only normal B, normal C (low accuracy), and normal C (latency) may be made (a configuration in which FIG. 55 is omitted and only FIGS. 53 and 54 are present).

  Further, the present invention is a case where the game state staying when selecting the variation pattern is determined by the internal game state, and the internal game state includes the special game state (win game) and the privilege game state (electric support). It can also be applied to the case of any of the attached game state systems). For example, a game when selecting a variation pattern based on a game state designation command such as a normal state (low probability state without electric support), a probabilistic change state (high probability state with electric support), or a short time state (low probability state with electric support) The consistency with the state can also be determined.

  Further, in the present invention, an error notification such as “communication abnormality” may be made when a consistency determination result indicating inconsistency occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
39c LED display 38c for holding composite display
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
71 Movable body accessory motor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Main control means for comprehensively controlling game operations including operation control related to a variable display operation for displaying and stopping display of game symbols.
Effect display means configured to be able to display the game symbol variation display operation in an effect manner;
An effect control means for controlling a variation display operation of the game symbol in the effect display means based on a control command from the main control means,
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player after a specific symbol display mode is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
The main control means includes
A winning lottery means for executing a winning lottery for determining whether the special gaming state is to be generated or to lose the special gaming state when the starting means detects a game ball;
Based on the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means, a winning type lottery means for performing a winning type lottery for a plurality of types of hits and at least one type of lose;
Gaming state data management means for managing gaming state data for identifying the current gaming state among a plurality of types of gaming states;
Based on the winning type lottery result by the winning type lottery means and the gaming state data, a variation pattern related to the variation display operation of the gaming symbol is a plurality of types associated with the winning type lottery result and the gaming state data. A variation pattern selecting means for selecting any one of the variation patterns;
First control command creating means for creating a first control command including game state data information capable of specifying the game state data;
Second control command creation means for creating a second control command including fluctuation pattern information that can identify the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting the first control command and the second control command to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
Control command receiving means capable of receiving the first control command and the second control command;
Based on variation pattern information included in the second control command received by the control command reception means, and a symbol variation display control means for controlling a variation display operation of the game symbol in the effect display means,
The symbol variation display control means includes:
Based on the gaming state data information included in the first control command and the variation pattern information included in the second control command, the gaming state data in which the variation pattern is included in the first control command; Gaming state consistency determining means for determining consistency as to whether the variation patterns are related to the same gaming state data;
When it is determined that the game state consistency is determined to be consistent, the game symbol is variably displayed in a variation display mode based on the variation pattern information included in the second control command as a variation display mode at the time of matching. Display operation control means at the time of alignment;
A display operation control means at the time of inconsistency that controls the game symbols not to be variably displayed in the variation display mode at the time of matching when it is determined as inconsistency by the gaming state consistency determination means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images